Quantcast
Channel: iPleaders
Viewing all 14289 articles
Browse latest View live

Ten Essential Clauses Of A Music License Agreement Under Indian Copyright Act, 1957

$
0
0

This article is written by M.Arjun, a 5th-year student studying in Government Law College, Thrissur. This article deals with the Essentials of a Music License Agreement.

Introduction

If there is something in this diverse world which people all over accept and adore, it is quite obvious that “music” falls under this division. Music is loved for various reasons such as for entertainment, relief from stress and even for emotional recharge. Artists put in a lot of hard work for creating musical works. They get acknowledged and rewarded for their efforts only when their work is shared with the public. When a musical work is created, the artist gets the copyright of the song along with a bundle of other rights. Sharing of music has to be done in such a way that the rights of the musician and the commercial value of his work are preserved. A well-drafted music-license agreement can serve this purpose.

Need For A Music License Agreement

Artists who create musical works deserve fair compensation for their creation. A musical work created can be used in a plethora of situations such as in a movie, album, live performance, online streaming and so on. The primary purpose of a music license agreement is to facilitate the availability of the composition to a third party. It also ensures that the musicians get their fair compensation. A music license agreement mandates certain conditions and governs the use of the musical composition in relation to various circumstances. These include:

  • Confirmation of royalties and mode of payment of royalties;
  • Provisions relating to the time for which the use is permitted;
  • The geography in which the music is permitted to use;
  • Right of license owners to sublicense;
  • Provisions relating to duplication of the song.

A music license agreement protects the rights of both parties and lays down special emphasis on preventing illegal use of the musical work which affects the commercial interests of the parties. Abstaining from entering into a music license agreement can be detrimental as the creator cannot commercialize his work effectively. A music license agreement protects the copyright of the musical work and minimizes the chances of infringement. Hence, a music license agreement, safeguarding the interest of parties enable the musical work to reach a wide number of audiences.

How Does It Work?

Owners or composers of a musical work cannot enter into a music license agreement with each and every party interested to use their music. Creating a music license agreement for each and every licensee is a cumbersome process. For this purpose, artists or owners of the musical work enter into a music license agreement with the publishing companies. Musicians themselves can publish their work on certain platforms such as the “Soundcloud”. But the majority of the publishing is done by the publishing companies. Artists are paid a lump sum amount or royalties as per sales in return. These publishing companies are mostly members of various copyright societies which are registered under section 33 of the Indian Copyright Act 1957.

Essentials of Music License Agreement

Some of the basic clauses that should be added to a music license agreement include:

License Grant 

This clause is the most important section within a music license agreement. It clarifies the nature and extent of the license. The licensor should expressly specify whether the license is a non-exclusive license or an exclusive license. An exclusive license prevents the licensor from further licensing the work. A non-exclusive license can allow the licensor to license the work with other potential licensees. The right of the licensee to further sublicense the work should be referred to in this clause. Even if a non-exclusive license is granted, the licensee or the publisher can restrict or impose certain conditions that prevent the licensor from licensing the work on different platforms such as CDs, websites or radio. The licensor can also mandate the geographical limit within which the license will be effective. As mentioned earlier, comes with a bundle of rights. For eg, the composer can grant a license exclusively for use in the film and retain the rights of the song in relation to online streaming, albums, public performances and so on. This clause should also provide the purpose and uses for which the license is granted.  

Royalties and Payments

The musician or the licensor is paid a certain sum of money in return for the license granted to the licensee. These payments are either made on a lump sum basis or as royalties on each broadcast. The licensor can also contract for an initial amount along with royalties on further usage. The time limit within which the payment is to be made should also be specified along with the provisions regarding interest on late payments. 

Rights and Obligations 

This clause mainly sets out the rights and duties of the parties in relation to the license. The licensor shall provide a clause to reserve all the rights other than the ones licensed. He may also set out a provision to state his name as the owner in all promotional activities of the musical compensation. The main idea behind this clause is to prevent the licensee from using the ownership rights or any other rights which are not granted. 

Term and Termination

The term specifies the date from which the agreement comes into force. The period for which the agreement shall remain in force should be stated under this clause. If there is any provision for automatic renewal, it should be explicitly mentioned. The conditions for termination and the notice period for avoiding the automatic renewal of the agreement should be mentioned without fail.

Effect on Termination

This clause specifies the effect of termination on the rights granted to the licensee. It also lists out various provisions that shall survive the termination of the agreement such as the payments and royalties clause.

Indemnification

The copyright owner shall indemnify the licensee from all the damages and third-party claims in relation to a breach committed by the owner of the copyright. Similarly, the indemnification clause also indemnifies the licensor from all damages and expenses caused by the use of the musical work by the licensee. 

Representation and Warranties

The licensor of a music license agreement should make certain warranties in the agreement. The publisher or the owner of the musical work shall be required to make a representation to the licensee that he is a member of a registered copyright society. Similarly, he will also be directed to make a representation that the musical work is new and original such that it does not violate the intellectual property of any third party. The licensor shall also authenticate that he owns all the exclusive rights concerning the musical work. 

https://lawsikho.com/course/certificate-course-in-advanced-civil-litigation-practice-procedure-and-drafting
       Click above

Dispute Resolution

A dispute resolution clause, as vital for any agreement also forms a crucial part of a music license agreement. The parties should agree to the laws according to which the agreement shall be construed or interpreted. If the parties prefer arbitration as the dispute resolution mechanism, they should agree upon features such as the number of arbitrators, the place of arbitration, method and so on. The choice of law and dispute resolution should be dealt with utmost importance, especially in cross border licensing. 

Miscellaneous Provisions

Apart from these provisions, various other clauses can be added. A separate provision regarding the method for serving the notice among parties can be discussed under a notice clause. A mechanism for alteration and amendment of the agreement can be set out in a separate clause. Various other provisions such as the binding of the agreement on the successors of the parties and clauses giving the agreement the dominant status can be added. Apart from these clauses, various boilerplate clauses such as on waiver and severability should also be a part of the music license agreement.u

Role of Copyright Societies

Copyright societies play an important role throughout the music licensing process. Copyright societies registered under section 33 of the Indian Copyright Act 1957 works for the management and protection of copyright owned by the authors of the work. They can issue licenses for any copyrighted work in accordance with the Copyright Act. They provide a license to all the third parties and collect the license fees from them. After deducting their administrative fee, these amounts are distributed among the creators of the copyrighted work. Hence, a lot of musicians, composers, and publishing companies are members of copyright societies. Copyright societies act like middlemen in safeguarding the copyrights as well as ensuring that the owners of the copyrights are rewarded for their work. Third parties like copyright societies are specialized in what they do and can effectively monitor the rights to prevent any sort of infringement

PPL (Phonographic Performance Limited) and IPRS (Indian Performing Rights Society) are the two most popular public performance licensing entities in India. Initially, both of them were registered as copyright societies under the Act but the 2012 Amendment of the Act brought in a lot of uncertainties among the copyright societies. With the 2012 amendment, they had to re-register under the Act and agree to new rules and procedures. Meanwhile, IPRS in 2017 got itself re-registered as a copyright society under the Act. PPL, the UK based performance rights organization has not re-registered and yet continues to function as a private limited company registered under the Companies Act. 

There are a lot of ambiguities concerning the functioning of various third party licensing organizations in India. Section 33 of the Copyright Act prevents any third party other than a registered copyright society to issue and grant a license for the copyrighted works. However, the Bombay High Court, in the case of Leopold Café Stores v. Novex Communications Pvt. Ltd held that Novex Communications, a non-registered third party licensing organization, cannot issue a license under section 33 of the Act. But, the court also held that as per section 30 an owner of a copyright can authorize an agent for issuing a license for his copyright works. The contradictory provisions enumerated by these 2 sections are now being legally utilized by these non-registered licensing organizations. However, licensing under this provision can only be done under the name of the original owner and not the third party association. 

Music License Agreement and End-Users

End-users refer to common users who consume music. They aren’t directly related to a music license agreement. On the other hand, the aftermath of a music license agreement is directly related to the end-users. A musical work is governed among the end-users through an end-user license agreement. Online streaming platforms such as Gaana, Hungama, and YouTube are the most common platforms where a lot of musical content is consumed by the end-users. Users of these platforms are required to sign or agree to an end-user license agreement. These agreements prevent illegal distribution or commercial use of the musical work without authorization, thereby enforcing the standards of protection laid down the native music license agreement. Users cannot play copyrighted music or sound recording in public performances and in places such as restaurants, bars, and saloons without the authorization of proper organizations. For instance, for playing a sound recording you will have to obtain a license from PPL. Whereas for playing the music and lyrics, the license is granted by IPRS. 

Conclusion 

It is no brainer that the next big thing after the creation of a musical work is to avail the musical composition for its mass consumption. The role of a music license agreement in this process is of paramount importance. There has not been much change in the past few years considering the way a musical work is licensed. But quite a lot has changed in the consumption of music. Thanks to new generation technologies and ever-rising popularity of the internet. Any content made available is always prone to infringement. The same goes applicable to musical works. 

But the online music streaming industry has reduced the infringement of music. The convenience and cost efficiency offered by these platforms helps a lot in preventing musical piracy. The digitalization of the licensing process has turned out to be a boon for the industry. Licensing organizations such as the PPL(Phonographic Performance Limited) has implemented this change. As per the “Music consumer study” of 2018, the old physical licensing process has contributed only to a 10.8% revenue. Similarly, the transition to the digital licensing processes resulted in more licensing activities thereby increasing revenues of the music licensing industry.

References

  1. https://blog.ipleaders.in/music-license-agreement/
  2. https://www.scribd.com/document/92321937/Music-License-Agreement
  3. https://www.myadvo.in/blog/public-performance-license/
  4. http://www.mondaq.com/india/x/750676/Copyright/Copyright+Societies+And+The+Copyright+Amendment+Act+2012
  5. https://spicyip.com/2018/08/the-state-of-indian-copyright-societies-and-assorted-bodies-after-the-copyright-amendment-act-2012.html
  6. http://www.mondaq.com/india/x/802398/music+arts/Online+Music+Licensing+In+India+PLUS+And+How+Is+This+A+Revolutionary+Change

Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skills.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post Ten Essential Clauses Of A Music License Agreement Under Indian Copyright Act, 1957 appeared first on iPleaders.


Articles 31A to 31C of Indian Constitution

$
0
0

This article is written by Shubhangi Upmanya, a student of Vivekanand Institute of professional studies, Indraprastha university. In this article, she discusses the Articles 31A to 31C of the constitution.

Introduction

From no person, the property belonging to him will be stripped off until there is an authority of law and if it has been taken into possession, then compensation will be provided, says Article 31 which went through a lot of amendments before it was annulled along with Article 19(1)(g). Article 19(1)(g) gave the right to property, however, restrictions can be imposed in the matter of public interest.

The annulment was made by the 44th Amendment Act in the year 1978 after which the Right to property elapsed and was left vulnerable.

Constitution 44th Amendment Act, 1978

One of the most vexed rights is the right to poverty. This right was given by the constitution in order to let the people enjoy their property in a smooth manner. But Article 31 enabled the government to take away the property when there lies a legal authority. Also, the term compensation provided in Article 31(2) was very arbitrary as there was no adjective given to it and it gave authority to the government to decide the amount.

To end up all kinds of debate regarding this right, the 44th amendment knocked on the door. By this amendment article 19(1)(g) and Article 31 was repealed and Article 31(1) was moved to Article 300A in the IX Schedule. 

https://lawsikho.com/course/diploma-advanced-contract-drafting-negotiation-dispute-resolutionClick Here

The Doctrine of Eminent Domain and Right to Property

The Doctrine of Eminent Domain, a concept taken from America, allows the sovereign to capture any private land and make it a public land that may benefit the public at large. The need is to just give compensation for it and this was done without taking into account the owner’s opinion.

Let’s put it this way, Manish owns private land in Madras and the government of Madras takes away his land without his consent and in return gives him a monetary compensation which is less than the market value which he would have got, if he had sold it.  

Maharao Sahib Sri Bhim Singhji V. Union of India

The land which was vacant in urban agglomerations was taken by the government to be used for public purposes.

The court ruled out that the land in urban agglomeration can’t be used for giving any kind of benefit to the public and it has nowhere been mentioned in that Act.

Now this article will be dealing will the following three provisions in-depth.

         ⇓                                                ⇓                                             ⇓

  Article 31A                               Article 31B                            Article 31C

Saving of Laws providing for the acquisition of estates, etc: Art. 31A

Let us talk about the emergence of article 31(1) which contains 5 sub-clauses. During pre-independence time, the zamindari system was prevalent. This system made the zamindars very wealthy with a large number of landholdings whereas, the peasants were left in financially deteriorating conditions. Congress in power, decided to abolish it by taking the property from the zamindars and giving it to poor people but the dilemma before them was to provide compensation because of the arbitrariness of the term “compensation” given in Article 31(2)( as mentioned before in this article).

Thereafter, this motion was taken back by the government and Article 31A walked in the Indian constitution by the First Amendment, in the year 1951.

This law in its 5 clauses states that any law,

  • made regarding the acquisition of any estate or right by the government or management of any property, or
  • creates a merger of any two or more companies 
  • receives the benefit of any agreement or lease or license;

 will not be void or null until it has received the assent of the President.

Ambika Mishra v. the State of U.P.

Uttar Pradesh government put a ceiling on a large number of permissible landholdings under the Land Holdings Act, 1960

Also under Section 3(17) of the land acquisition act, only the ‘male’ was considered as the landholder and owner whereas ‘unmarried female’ or ‘woman whose husband is the landowner’, wasn’t considered as the owner of the land. Apart from the acquisition part, many people have also looked at this discriminatory side of the Act.

The court upheld the constitutional validity of Article 31(1)(a).

Validation of certain Acts and Regulations: Art. 31B

After the introduction of Article 31A in the Constitution, many problems arising out of the violation of fundamental rights contained in Part III of the Constitution were eradicated.

Article 31B states that the acts which are present in the ninth schedule and are inconsistent with the provisions laid down by the constitution or resist any decree or order will be left on the competent legislature to amend, revoke or to let it be in force. Anything contained in this Article does not undermine any provision contained in Article 31A.

Article 31B did not allow the government to make provisions blatantly against the provisions of the constitution but only which were fair with the provision of the constitution and which are inconsistent should be made void. This article stood as a shield for the laws contained in the Ninth Schedule as it makes certain that no question arises on any law contained in that schedule.

Suppose there is an Act, call it XYZ, which is not included in the ninth schedule and as a result, it can be made void but gradually it gets included in the ninth schedule, then, it will come under the blanket protection of Article 31B. This is what the retrospective effect is all about, which this Article carries with itself. 

Waman Rao v. Union of India, AIR 1981 SC 71

On 24th April 1973, a famous case judgment laid down the Doctrine of the basic structure, Kesvananda Bharati v. the State of Kerala. In reference to that judgment, this case ruled out that any amendment made in the IX Schedule before the Kesvananda Bharti case will not be challenged in the court but any amendments made after that, will.

Saving of laws giving effect to certain directive principles: Art. 31C

Back in the year 1971, the 25th amendment showed its face. 

From this amendment, Article 31C set its foot in. Previous articles were concerned with fundamental rights but this Article talks about the DPSP, the rights contained in Part IV of the Constitution. It says that any law made by the state that secures the rights contained in Part IV of the constitution can not be declared void or challenged on the grounds of Article 14, Article 19 or Article 31. 

Putting it the other way, it was basically kept out of the judicial review.

It also stated that if such law is made by the legislature or state, then that law should be sent for the assent of the president. Now, in any case, the president certifies the law by giving his assent and the law is passed which is still violating Article 14, 19, and 31, in that case, we are left with nothing as an option because it is secured from any kind of judicial perusal. 

Under this article, no law which gives effect to the provisions contained in Article 39B and Article 39C can be challenged under Article 14, Article 19, or Article 31.

Kesavananda Bharati v. the State of Kerala

This famous case decided by a nine-judge bench is one of the most praised landmark judgments. It laid down the doctrine of the basic structure, which stated that any law made should not be violative of the fundamental rights and if amendments are to be made then it should be made as such that they do not destroy the basic structure. 

Fundamental rights are of utmost importance and they should be preserved with all due respect by the state and provisions should be made to protect them and abrogate them. With this thought, this case raised questions on the constitutionality of the 25th amendment and therefore, declared that the basic structure of the fundamental rights should not be violated by the state or legislature under the provisions of Article 368 and the second part of the Article gave the jurisdiction of the court, a boot. Hence, the question on the validity of Article 31C ended with its demise, thereafter. 

Minerva Mills Ltd. v. Union of India

As we all know fundamental rights are the basic feature of the constitution and under Article 368 they need to be preserved. Well, in this, the extended portion of Article 31C was eradicated completely with the rationale that it attacked the fundamental rights under Article 368. It was amazingly pointed out by the eminent judge that by this Article the DPSP was secured which added to the weight of DPSP which went up against the weight of the fundamental rights but fundamental rights being paramount should not be curtailed by any law whatsoever. The judgment also stood up for the concept of judicial review which was not made available to the people in case of infringement of their fundamental rights.

Sanjeev Coke Mfg. Co v. Bharat Coking Coal Ltd., (1983) 1 SCC 147

The court pointed out in this case, that the fundamental rights and the directive principles of state policy should be companions and amplify each other.

Further, Article 31(C) was stated as unconstitutional and against the fundamental rights. There should be no conflict arising out of the issue involving the DPSP and the fundamental rights.

9th Schedule Laws not beyond judicial review

The 9th schedule finds its relations with the famous Keshvananda Bharti case of 1973.

It can be said that when the government wants to keep any law unchallenged then it can put it in the 9th Schedule as it is kept out of the judicial review. Let’s talk about the right to property, many reforms for the property rights and the acquisition of property and the rights along with it have been seen setting their feet in the constitution while they were all included in the ninth schedule. Hiding behind this schedule, the fundamental rights were getting infringed and still were left without a judicial review but now they stand repealed. The query before the law was whether the act or any of its part is declared to be unconstitutional then will it find its way in the ninth schedule? It is just not limited to the property Act but extends to all kinds of acts as arbitrary in nature as possible. For instance, the Mandal case Indra Sawhney V. Union of India, where the reservation was 69% which was more than the allowed bracket of 50%. 

This percentage can be increased manifoldly to 90% or 95%, the need is just to keep this Article in the ninth schedule. 

This was the situation before the ruling of the case mentioned below where it was ruled out that that the laws contained in the IX Schedule have to follow the Doctrine of Basic Structure.

IR Coelho v. State of Tamil Nadu, 2007 (1) SC 137

Fundamental rights can be amended but as far as it does not curtail the basic structure. Balancing should be done between fundamental rights and DPSP. This case was passed on to the higher bench constitution bench of five judges.

In this case, two questions were raised which were:

  • If an Act as a whole or any part of that Act is against the fundamental right in Article 14, 19 and 21, then will it be included in the ninth amendment? 
  • Whether the amendment which has been done in the IX Schedule destroys the basic structure?

The court stated the if the constitutionality of any part has already been upheld by the court then it will not be challenged but if it has been incorporated after 24th April 1973 then it can be open up to challenge in the court. All the articles incorporated in the ninth schedule have to pass the test of basic structure which determines if the particular provision violates the basic structure.

Conclusion 

 “Amend your procedures and your doings, to improve in the future”.

Well, this is what our constitution believes. From the very 1st Amendment in 1951 to the 124th Amendment in 2019, the Constitution has been amending its way to the doorway of betterment. It wasn’t all sunshine and rain, in fact, it had its own thunderstorm. 

The property right turned out to be the most controversial right with lots of reforms and criticism along with it. With Article 31, 19(1)(g) and Article 31C being stated as unconstitutional and its second part been shifted to Article 300A for making the fundamental right only a constitutional right, the property law kept diminishing. 

Let us put another issue this way that there has to be security given to Part IV of the Constitution but not by infringing Part III of the constitution, they have to be balanced. Still, there is a lot of change to be made and a long way to go because the Constitution is constant.

 

The post Articles 31A to 31C of Indian Constitution appeared first on iPleaders.

Article 21: Meaning & Scope of Protection of Life & Personal Liberty

$
0
0

This article is written by Jessica Kaur, a first-year student currently pursuing B.A. LL.B. (Hons.) at Rajiv Gandhi National University of Law, Punjab. This is an exhaustive article exploring the meaning, scope and various aspects of the Fundamental Right to Protection of Life and Personal Liberty under article 21.

Introduction 

The right to live a free, full and dignified life is one of the most basic principles of human existence. Every person is entitled to live their life on their own terms, with no unfair interference from others. A successful democracy can only be one that guarantees its citizens the right to protect their own life and liberty.

In India, the Protection of Life and Personal Liberty is a Fundamental Right granted to citizens under Part III of the Constitution of India, 1950. These Fundamental Rights represent the foundational values cherished by the people and are granted against actions of the state, meaning that no act of any state authority can violate any such right of a citizen except according to the procedure established by law.

Article 21 of this part states that “No person shall be deprived of his life or personal liberty except according to the procedure established by law”, and this is known as the Right to Life and Personal Liberty.

Hence, this Article prohibits the encroachment upon a person’s right to life and personal liberty against the state. The state here refers to all entities having statutory authority, like the Government and Parliament at the Central and State level, local authorities, etc. Thus, violation of the right by private entities is not within its purview.

The terms ‘life’ and ‘personal liberty’ encompass a wide variety of rights of the people, which are a result of the evolution in the interpretation of Article 21 by the courts over the years. Here, we shall examine the various aspects of this Fundamental Right; but before that, let’s have a look at the jurisprudential evolution of this concept and the significance of one of the most famous judgements related to it – Maneka Gandhi v. Union of India (1978).

https://lawsikho.com/course/diploma-entrepreneurship-administration-business-laws

Click Here

Personal Liberty: Meaning and Scope

The meaning of Personal Liberty of a citizen in India has evolved and its scope has widened. Prior to the Maneka Gandhi case, it had a relatively narrower scope, comprising only some liberties of a person.

Personal Liberty was first interpreted in the case of A.K. Gopalan v. State of Madras in 1950, which is explained below.

A.K. Gopalan v. State of Madras (1950): Prevention Detention

Facts:

In this case, the Petitioner, a communist leader, was detained under the Preventive Detention Act, 1950. He claimed that such detention was illegal as it infringed upon his freedom of movement granted in Article 19(1)(d) of the Constitution of India and thus also violated his Personal Liberty as granted by Article 21 since freedom of movement should be considered a part of a person’s personal liberty.

Judgement: 

The court stated that personal liberty meant liberty of the physical body and thus did not include the rights given under Article 19(1). Hence, Personal liberty was considered to include some rights like the right to sleep and eat, etc. while the right to move freely was relatively minor and was not included in one’s “personal” liberty.

The subsequent case of Kharak Singh v. State of U.P. and Ors. (1964) saw an expansion in the meaning of Personal liberty, explained as follows.

Kharak Singh v. State of U.P. and Ors. (1964): Personal Liberty Curtailed

Facts: 

The petitioner, in this case, was accused of dacoity but was released due to a lack of evidence against him. The Uttar Pradesh Police then began surveillance over him which included domiciliary visits at night, periodical enquiries, verification of movements and the like. The petitioner filed a writ petition challenging the constitutional validity of this State action.

Judgement: 

It was held that the right to personal liberty constitutes not only the right to be free from restrictions placed on one’s movements but also to be free from encroachments on one’s private life. Thus, personal liberty was considered to include all the residual freedoms of a person not included in Article 19(1).

However, Maneka Gandhi v. Union of India (1978) proved to be a landmark case in the evolution of Personal Liberty, greatly widening the scope of this right as granted by Article 21.

Maneka Gandhi v. Union of India (1978): Right to Travel

Facts: 

The petitioner, in this case, was ordered by the Regional Passport Office, Delhi to surrender her newly-made passport within 7 days due to the Central Government’s decision to impound it “in public interest”, in accordance with the Passport Act of 1967. Upon requesting a statement of the reasons for such impounding, the Government replied that they could not furnish a copy of the same “in the interest of the general public.” A writ petition was filed by the petitioner challenging the Government’s decision of impounding and also of not providing the reasons, as well as not allowing the petitioner to defend herself.

Judgement: 

The Honourable Supreme Court held that the right to travel and go outside the country must be included in the Right to Personal Liberty. It stated that “personal liberty” given in Article 21 had the widest amplitude and covered a variety of rights related to the personal liberty of a person. The scope of personal liberty was, hence, greatly increased and it was held to include all the rights granted under Article 21, as well as all other rights related to the personal liberty of a person. Such a right could only be restricted by a procedure established by law, which had to be “fair, just and reasonable, not fanciful, oppressive or arbitrary.”

Hence, the Court adjudged in the case that:

  1. The Government action was not justified as there was no pressing reason for the impounding of the petitioner’s passport and it was a violation of her Fundamental Rights.
  2. The principles of Natural Justice were violated as the petitioner was not given the opportunity to be heard.

Since this landmark case, the courts have sought to give a wider meaning to “personal liberty”. The principles of natural justice have also been emphasized upon, as any procedure which restricts the liberty of a person must be fair, just and reasonable.

What is the inter-relation between Articles 14, 19 and 21?

As we have seen above, the inter-relation between Articles 14, 19 and 21 has evolved with the evolution in the meaning of Personal Liberty. 

First of all, let us take a look at Articles 14 and 19 given in the Indian Constitution.

Article 14 grants equality before the law and equal protection of the laws to all persons in the Indian territory and prohibits discrimination on the basis of religion, race, caste, sex and place of birth.

Clause 1 of Article 19 grants all citizens the right to freedom of speech and expression, to assemble peaceably and form associations, to move freely and reside anywhere throughout the country, and to practice any profession, occupation or trade.

All other clauses of this Article allow the State to impose reasonable restrictions on the rights granted in the above clause “in the interests of the sovereignty and integrity of India, the security of the State, friendly relations with foreign States, public order, decency or morality or in relation to contempt of court, defamation or incitement to an offence.”

Earlier, Articles 19 and 21 were held to be completely exclusive and separate from each other. The position changed slowly as Personal Liberty evolved to include all rights other than those mentioned in Article 19, and they were considered complementary to each other. 

The case of Maneka Gandhi v. Union of India, however, brought a sea change. The Supreme Court held that Articles 19(1) and 21 are not mutually exclusive as the Right to Life and Personal Liberty covers a wide variety of rights, some of which have been given additional protection under Article 19(1).

Article 19 and Article 21 go hand-in-hand and the procedure established by law restricting these rights should stand the scrutiny of other provisions of the Constitution as well – including Article 14. Thus, a law encroaching upon one’s personal liberty must not only pass the test of Article 21 but also of Article 14 and Article 19 of the Constitution.

These three rights are, hence, interconnected and provide safeguards against arbitrary actions of the government. They are meant to be read together and interpreted in accordance with each other. All three of them grant basic human rights and freedoms to the citizens and their immense collective importance has given them the name “Golden Triangle” in jurisprudence.

Scope of Right to Life and Personal Liberty

We have had enough discussion on the expansion in the scope of Article 21. What exactly constitutes this Right today? We shall hereafter examine the various aspects of Right to Life and Personal Liberty.

Right to live with human dignity

It is not enough to ensure that a person has a Right to Live. An essential element of life is one’s dignity and respect; therefore, each person has been guaranteed the right to live with dignity – which means having access to the necessities of human life as well as having autonomy over one’s personal decisions.

In Occupational Health and Safety Association v. Union of India (2014), the protection of health and strength of workers and their access to just and humane conditions of work were taken as essential conditions to live with human dignity.

Occupational Health and Safety Association v. Union of India (2014)

Facts: 

In this case, a non-profit organisation filed a petition seeking guidelines for occupational safety and health conditions in various industries, especially thermal power plants. This was in view of the various skin diseases, lung abnormalities, etc. suffered by their workers due to unhealthy working conditions. It also called for compensation to victims of occupational health disorders.

Judgement: 

The court recognised the State’s duty to protect workers from dangerous or unhygienic working conditions and remanded the matter to various High Courts to check the issue of thermal power plants in their respective states.

The Supreme Court, in the case of Navtej Singh Johar v. Union of India (2018), said that the Right to dignity means the right to “full personhood”, and “includes the right to carry such functions and activities as would constitute the meaningful expression of the human self.” In this case, a very important aspect of human dignity was talked about – the control over one’s own intimate relations.

Navtej Singh Johar v. Union of India (2018)- Homosexuality

Facts: 

In this case, the petitioner NGO filed a Writ Petition challenging Section 377 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860 as it criminalised sexual acts between LGBT persons, claiming that it was against the Fundamental Rights.

Judgement: 

The court, applying the principle of human dignity, said that Section 377 was violative of Articles 14, 15, 19, and 21 of the Constitution to the extent that it criminalised consensual sexual acts of adults (i.e. persons above the age of 18 years who are competent to consent) in private. Hence, sexual acts between LGBT adults conducted with the free consent of the parties involved were declared legal.

As can be observed, human dignity is not a straightjacket idea. Rather, it involves all those rights and freedoms which enable a person to live life without encroachment upon his or her self-respect, pride and safety.

Right to livelihood

To survive, a person requires access to financial and material resources to fulfill his various needs. The law recognises that every person, whether man or woman, has an equal right to livelihood so that he or she may acquire the necessary resources like food, water, shelter, clothes and more. No person deserves to live in poverty and squalor because of being deprived of the chance to earn for himself.

An important case in this matter has been described below.

Olga Tellis and Ors. v. Bombay Municipal Corporation (1986)- Right to Livelihood

Facts: 

The petitioners, in this case, were slum and pavement dwellers in the city of Bombay. They filed a writ petition against an earlier decision of the State of Maharashtra and the Bombay Municipal Corporation to forcibly evict dwellers and deport them, which led to the demolition of certain dwellings. They challenged these actions on the grounds that evicting a person from his pavement dwelling or slum meant depriving him of his right to livelihood, which should be considered a part of his constitutional right to life. 

Judgement: 

The court concluded that though the slum and pavement dwellers were deprived of their Right to Livelihood, the government was justified in evicting them as they were making use of the public property for private purposes. However, they should not be considered as trespassers as they occupied the filthy places out of sheer helplessness. It was ordered that any evictions would take place only after the approaching monsoon season and the persons who were censused before 1976 would be entitled to resettlement.

While the case failed to bring successful resettlement to the dwellers and, in fact, is sometimes cited as justification for eviction of people by the State, it did play its part in establishing the Right to Livelihood as part of the Fundamental Right to Life.

Right to privacy

Right to Privacy sounds like a very basic and obvious right to possess, but for a long time, it was not recognised as a distinct right by the Government because of not being mentioned explicitly by the drafters in the Constitution of India. Over time, there has been a growing recognition of a person’s autonomy over his or her personal body, mind and information which has been given due emphasis by the courts in various judgements.

The Right to Privacy first saw mention in the following case. 

R. Rajagopal v. State of Tamil Nadu (1994)

Facts: 

In this case, a person convicted of murder wrote his autobiography, in which he also disclosed his relationship with the prison officials, some of whom were his partners in crime. His wife sent it for publishing to the Tamil magazine ‘Nakkheeran’, but the prison officials interfered in the publication. The editors of the magazine filed a petition to restrain the government or the prison authorities from stopping the publication of the autobiography.

Judgement:

The court held that it was the right of the criminal Auto Shankar to do whatever he wanted with his private information. Thus, the magazine could not be stopped from publishing what it called the “autobiography” of the criminal.

This case set the stage for future judgements regarding the Right to Privacy and paved the path for it to be established as a part of the Fundamental Rights granted under Part III of the Constitution.

Is Right to Privacy an absolute right?

Although Right to Privacy is one of the most essential rights of a person, especially in a modern democracy, it is not an absolute and untouchable right. There are certain situations where reasonable restrictions can be placed on this right of a person for the greater good. 

One such situation can be seen in the infamous case of Mr X v. Hospital Z.

Mr. X v. Hospital Z (1998)

Facts: 

The appellant, in this case, was found to be HIV(+) when his blood sample was tested. This fact was disclosed by the Hospital to others without the appellant’s express consent. Due to such disclosure, the appellant’s proposed marriage to Ms. Y was called off and he was shunned by society.

The aggrieved person approached the National Consumer Dispute Redressal Commission claiming that there was a breach of confidentiality on the part of the Hospital, but his complaint was dismissed. The appellant then approached the Supreme Court contending that the Duty of Care of the medical professionals as well as his Right to Privacy were violated.

Judgement: 

The court held that the appellant’s Right to Privacy was superseded by Ms. Y’s right to know such a material fact about the person she was about to marry, as it was bound to affect her life as well. It was further held that a medical professional’s duty to maintain confidentiality could be breached in cases where public interest was at stake.

Telephone-Tapping: An invasion of Right to Privacy

In today’s digital world, Right to Privacy has acquired a new meaning. In a world where your finger controls everything you put out for everyone to see, can you imagine your personal information being secretly spied on by someone?

In the 90s, telephone-tapping of private conversations by the State became a much-talked-about issue in the case of People’s Union for Civil Liberties v. Union of India (1997). Let us take a look at the facts of the case.

People’s Union for Civil Liberties v. Union of India (1997)

Facts: 

In this case the petitioner, a voluntary organisation, challenged the constitutional validity of Section 5(2) of the Indian Telegraph Act, 1885 which empowered the Central or State government or its authorised officer to intercept and record messages in case of public emergency or in public interest. This came in the wake of the report on telephone-tapping of politicians which showed that many interceptions were not backed by proper authorizations and in many cases, no proper records or logs of the same were maintained.

Judgement: 

The court held that interception can be made only by specific top government officials, only when it is necessary, and it should not exceed a total of six months. The copies of such intercepted messages should be destroyed as soon as they are no longer useful. Recognizing a person’s Right to Privacy, it ordered the formation of a Review Committee to check that such interception was not in contravention of Section 5(2) and if it was, the messages shall be destroyed immediately.

Right to Privacy and Aadhaar Card

One of the most important judgements related to Right to Privacy came in the case of Justice K.S. Puttaswamy (Retd.) v. Union of India (2015). This case established Right to Privacy as a Fundamental Right granted to the citizens by the Constitution.

Justice K.S. Puttaswamy (Retd.) v. Union of India (2015)

Facts: 

The case was brought by a retired Karnataka High Court Justice before a nine-judge Constitutional bench, challenging the government’s scheme of making the Aadhaar card (a uniform system of biometrics-based identity card) for all citizens. He claimed that it was a violation of the Right to Privacy, and the fact that there were no strict data protection laws in India meant that people’s personal information could be misused. The Attorney General argued that the Constitution did not guarantee a separate Right to Privacy.

Judgement: 

The bench unanimously held that Right to Privacy was a part of one’s Right to Life granted by Article 21 and included the right to keep personal information private. While it upheld the constitutional validity of the Aadhaar Card, it struck down certain provisions of the Aadhaar (Targeted Delivery of Financial and Other Subsidies, Benefits and Services) Act, 2016.

Right to Health and Medical Assistance

The Right to Life, of course, cannot be upheld if every person is not given access to proper health and medical assistance. It is the most primary prerequisite to living a full life. 

However, sometimes doctors and medical institutions hesitate to assist the ailing persons due to fear of long formalities and complications, especially in medico-legal cases. An example of such a situation is given below.

Pt. Parmanand Katara v. Union of India (1989)

Facts:

In this case, a scooterist faced an accident upon crashing with a car but upon being brought to a hospital, he was refused treatment and directed to another hospital 20 km away due to the non-occurrence of legal and police formalities. A writ petition was filed in public interest to make it an obligation for doctors to provide medical assistance immediately and not have to wait for completion of formalities.

Judgement:

It was recognised that Article 21 renders paramount importance to the preservation of human life. Thus, it is the obligation of all medical professionals to give immediate health assistance to all patients, without being put under any legal impediment. It was decided that no medical professional shall be harassed for any investigation and he or she would not be asked to testify in court unless necessary and absolutely relevant.

Thus, this case freed the medical professionals of any legal restrictions and thereby made it an obligation and duty for them to provide immediate assistance to patients to uphold the Right to Life.

Right to sleep

All of us love sleeping, right? But many are not aware that the Right to Sleep is a distinct part of one’s Fundamental Rights, which protects against any actions of the State leading to the unlawful deprivation of a person’s sleep.

Re-Ramlila Maidan Incident v. Home Secretary and Ors. (2012) was the case which led to the establishment of this Right.

Re-Ramlila Maidan Incident v. Home Secretary and Ors. (2012)

Facts: 

In this case, a Yoga training camp was to be held in Ramlila Maidan during June, 2011 but on 4th June it turned into a hunger strike against black money and corruption led by Baba Ramdev. The protests took place all day and at 12:30 at night, when all the protestors were sleeping, a large number of CRPF, Delhi Police force and Rapid Action Force personnel reached the venue to bring the sadhu out. A scuffle ensued between the personnel and the sadhu’s supporters which ended in throwing teargas shells on the people.

Judgement

The court acknowledged that sleep is an essential part of a healthy life and a necessity for the maintenance of individual peace. Thus, it held that every person is entitled to sleep as comfortably and freely as he breathes. If any person’s sleep is disturbed without any reasonable justification, it amounts to torture and is a violation of his human rights. Therefore, making the sleeping persons flee and causing mayhem at the location was held as unlawful, since there was no illegal activity taking place there.

Arrest and detention of a judgement-debtor

The first question that comes to mind is, who is a judgement-debtor?

A judgement-debtor refers to a person against whom a judgement has been made ordering him to pay a sum of money i.e. damages, which remains unsatisfied. Thus, he is a debtor of those damages with respect to the judgement passed.

Now, if the judgement-debtor continues to fail to pay the money, what is the recourse?

Jolly George Varghese and Anr. v. Bank of Cochin (1980)

Facts: 

In this case, a court warrant was made for the arrest and detention of two judgement-debtors as they had not paid the money due to the Bank. Their property was also encroached upon for the purpose of selling it and obtaining the money. All this was done without ascertaining that the judgement-debtors had the means to pay but had intentionally evaded it, i.e. had committed an act of bad-faith. Hence, an appeal was filed by the two.

Judgement: 

The court declared that it was necessary to ascertain whether an act of bad faith had been committed, and only then the judgement-debtors should be arrested and detained.

Thus, the court, keeping in mind the life and personal liberty of the judgement-debtor, narrowed down the circumstances in which he can be arrested. Therefore, if a judgement-debtor fails to pay the money, he can be arrested – provided that he deliberately avoided paying it even while possessing the means to do so.

Bonded labour system

Having to work in a bonded labour system is one of the most obvious violations of one’s Right to Life to Personal Liberty. Treated as slaves, the bonded labourers face working conditions full of destitution and misery and are often greatly exploited. 

The Bonded Labour System (Abolition) Act was passed in 1976 as a step towards ending this system, but it isn’t always abided by completely. It is in times like these that the court has to step in and ensure that the labourers can enjoy their Fundamental Rights.

To truly achieve personal liberty, the labourer must not only be freed but also rehabilitated in order to establish an independent life. This was reiterated in the following case.

Neeraja Chaudhary v. State of M.P. (1984)

Facts: 

In this case, a writ petition was filed in the matter of 135 bonded labourers working in stone quarries in Faridabad, who had been released as per an earlier court order and returned to their home villages in Madhya Pradesh with the promise of rehabilitation. However, even six months down the line, they had not been rehabilitated and, in fact, were living on the verge of starvation. Because of this, many wanted to go back to bonded labour rather than starve.

Judgement: 

The court emphasized upon the need for proper rehabilitation of the labourers to uphold their Right to Life and Personal Liberty granted by Article 21, and ordered the State government to undertake appropriate measures for the same.

Right to die

The Right to Life confers upon the person the right to live a full life and dictates that the State cannot interfere in this right except through procedure established by law. But, what if a person chooses to end his own life? Can he interfere in his own Right to Life?

Section 309 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860 criminalises attempt to suicide, with the convicted person facing up to two years of imprisonment, or a fine, or both.

Section 306, meanwhile, criminalises the abetment to suicide i.e., the assistance given by a person in the process of the commitment of suicide by another.

You might say that such a view is inhumane because a person, especially one who is depressed or frustrated to the point of wanting to die, should not be criminalised for attempting suicide. A person has the Right to Life which should naturally imply the Right to end his life too.

Such a view was taken by the court in the case of P. Rathinam v. Union of India (1994).

P. Rathinam v. Union of India (1994)- Right to Die

Facts: 

In this case, two petitions were filed challenging Section 309 of the IPC on the grounds that it stood in violation of Articles 14 and 21 of the Constitution.

Judgement: 

Keeping Article 21 as well as the principles of natural justice in mind, the two-judge bench ruled that Right to Life also included the right to not live a forced life. Therefore, Section 309 of the Indian Penal Code was declared void.

However, the court then changed its position in the subsequent case of Smt. Gian Kaur v. State of Punjab (1996).

Smt. Gian Kaur v. State of Punjab (1996)

Facts: 

In this case, Gian Kaur and her husband Harbans Singh were convicted under Section 306 of the IPC due to abetment to the suicide of Kulwant Kaur. Subsequently, the constitutional validity of Sections 306 and 309 was challenged.

Judgement: 

Here, the judgement given in the previously-mentioned case was overruled and it was held that Section 309 of the IPC was not unconstitutional and that Section 306, criminalising abetment to suicide, was Constitutional. The court concluded that suicide being an unnatural termination of life, it was against the concept of Right to Life.

Euthanasia 

The term euthanasia comes from two Greek words – eu meaning ‘good’ and thantos meaning ‘death’. Thus, it essentially means ‘good death’. It is the practice of ending the life of a person suffering from an incurable disease but still breathing, thus undergoing great agony and distress. It helps him or her go through a gentle and painless death instead, by either an act or omission upon his or her body. It is, thus, also known as “mercy killing” or “assisted suicide”.

There may be two types of euthanasia- active and passive.

  1. Active Euthanasia involves doing something to a patient to end his or her life, with their consent. For eg. giving an injection.
  2. Passive Euthanasia involves withdrawing medical services with the intention to end the patient’s life. In other words, it means not doing something to a patient, which if done would have saved his or her life. For eg. stop feeding the patient.

In Smt. Gian Kaur v. State of Punjab, the court observed that euthanasia could be made lawful only by legislation. The reasoning behind this was to prevent unscrupulous actions by ill-intentioned people. 

The landmark case in this matter, however, was Common Cause (A Regd. Society) v. Union of India (2018), which made passive euthanasia lawful.

Common Cause (A Regd. Society) v. Union of India (2018)

Facts: 

In this case, an NGO filed a Public Interest Litigation in the Supreme Court to legalize living will and passive euthanasia. It contended that a person’s right to life included the right to have a dignified death as well, but modern technology enabled the unnecessary prolonging of an incurable patient’s life, only causing pain and suffering to him and his family. Thus, living will by the patient could authorize the family and the hospital to end his agony.

Judgement: 

A five-judge Constitution bench ruled that Right to Life also includes a person’s Right to Die with dignity, and thus allowed passive euthanasia i.e. the will of patients to withdraw medical support in case of slipping into an irreversible state of coma.

Thus, currently, active euthanasia is illegal in India, just as in most other countries. On the other hand, passive euthanasia is legal in our country, subject to certain strict guidelines.

Right to a Healthy Environment

Nature has showered us with its gifts since the beginning of time, and these gifts and resources act as the backbone of human existence. A clean, healthy and harmonious environment is one of the necessities for the true enjoyment of life, and thus, it comes as no surprise that our right to live in a pollution-free environment is included in the expansive Right to Life.

The rapid growth of technology beginning with the Industrial Revolution and growing over the centuries has, however, not helped the environment at all. The establishment of more and more industries and a rise in the demand for products manufactured by them has increased the waste churned out by them. Where does all this waste go? Unfortunately, it ends up in the land, water, and air.

Several court judgements have led to the establishment of our right to a healthy environment and the measures to curb the pollution of the Earth. 

Right to get pollution-free water and air 

Without clean drinking water, we can’t last half a week, and without air, we can’t even last half an hour. It is very important to have access to pollution-free water and air for a sound mind and body.

The case of Subhash Kumar v. State of Bihar (1991) emphasized this right as a part of Article 21.

Subhash Kumar v. State of Bihar (1991)

Facts: 

In this case, a Public Interest Litigation was filed against two iron and steel companies alleging that they were polluting the nearby river Bokaro by dumping waste into it. The petitioner pointed fingers at the State Pollution Control Board for failing to prevent this and offered to collect the waste and sludge himself.

Judgement: 

The court confirmed that the Fundamental Right to Life includes the right to enjoy pollution-free water and air, and if anything endangers the quality of water and air then a citizen can file a petition in court.

However, this particular PIL was dismissed on the grounds that it had been filed in personal interest for the petitioner’s own gains, and that it lacked any basis as the State Pollution Control Board had taken appropriate measures to control pollution.

Protection of Ecology and Environmental Pollution

Nature needs to be protected not just for our own eating, drinking and breathing, but also to preserve the entire ecosystem which maintains the ecological balance on Earth.

Examine the cases below to understand some of the judgements which have contributed towards greater protection of the environment.

Rural Litigation and Entitlement Kendra v. State of U.P. (1985) or the Dehradun Valley Litigation

Facts: 

In this case, an NGO filed a petition against the limestone quarries in the Dehradun-Mussoorie area, alleging that their work was unauthorised and was leading to ecological imbalance in the surroundings due to the landslides caused.

Judgement: 

The court only allowed a few mines to remain open while all the others, which were causing harm, were shut down. The Valley was declared as an ecologically sensitive area and measures were taken for its restoration. Most importantly, this case led to the enactment of the Environment Protection Act, 1986.

M.C. Mehta and Anr. v. Union of India (1987) or the Shriram Food and Fertilizer Case

Facts: 

In this case, the chemical plant Shriram Food and Fertilizer Ltd. in Delhi suffered a major leakage of the deadly oleum gas in October 1986 and faced another minor leakage two days later. This incident affected almost two lakh people in the near radius.

Judgement: 

The court held the industry liable for its negligence and ordered it to pay Rs 20 lakh as compensation to the victims. It also ordered the establishment of an Expert Committee to overlook the operation of the industry. It was directed for all workers to be properly trained, and for loudspeakers to be installed in the premises to warn people in case of any leakage.

Thus, this proved to be a landmark case in environmental legislation as it established the principle of absolute liability, which involves holding the industry dealing in hazardous substances absolutely liable for all damages caused by its faulty operations.

Indian Council for Enviro-Legal Action v. Union of India and Ors. (2011)

Facts: 

In this case, Heavy chemical industry plants were being operated in the Udaipur district of Rajasthan, producing dangerous chemicals like oleum and the “H” acid. The petition was filed to prevent and remedy the pollution caused by them.

Judgement: 

The court condemned the pollution caused by the industrial company Hindustan Agro Chemicals Ltd. and imposed a heavy fine of almost Rs. 38 crores for remedying the environment damages caused.

Vellore Citizens Welfare Forum v. Union of India and Ors. (1996) 

Facts: 

In this case, large-scale pollution was being caused to River Palar in Tamil Nadu due to the discharge of untreated waste by the nearby industries into it. Moreover, over 35,000 hectares of agricultural land had become unfit for cultivation. A Public Interest Litigation was filed against the same.

Judgement: 

The court admitted that on one hand, the industries were contributors to the development and a source of employment to thousands of people but on the other, they were the cause of environmental degradation. Therefore, it imposed a fine of Rs. 10,000 on them and emphasized the setting-up of a Green Bench in court to deal with environmental cases in a speedy manner.

Mining in Aravalli hills range banned

The court has emphasized the need to protect the Aravalli hills, one of the few non-concrete areas left in the National Capital Region. Mining activities being undertaken here were banned in the case of M.C. Mehta v. Union of India and Ors. (2004).

M.C. Mehta v. Union of India and Ors. (2004)

Facts: 

The petition, in this case, was raised against mining activities 5 km away from the Delhi-Haryana border and the Aravalli hills area, which was causing environmental pollution due to the blasting operations involved.

Judgement: 

The court held that the Aravalli hill range had to be protected at any cost and so prohibited any mining activities in the area. It appointed a Monitoring Committee to oversee the restoration of the environment quality.

Freedom from noise pollution: Another component of Article 21 

In this fast-paced, chaotic urban world, the noise has become a major deterrent to a peaceful and healthy lifestyle. The huge public loudspeakers, noisy firecrackers, and even the incessant honks of vehicles on the road have become a source of great annoyance and also of serious health hazards.

In the Re: Noise Pollution case (2005), the court addressed the issue of noise pollution and moved a step towards controlling it.

Re: Noise Pollution case (2005)

Facts: 

In this case, a petition was filed against the use of loudspeakers in religious congregations, political rallies, social occasions, etc. and the use of firecrackers which created a lot of noise pollution and disturbance. This was in the wake of a thirteen-year-old rape victim’s cries for help going unheard due to the blasting of music on loudspeakers in the locality.

Judgement: 

The court acknowledged the grave adverse effects of loud noise and gave certain directions to prevent the same-

  1. Prohibition of bursting noisy firecrackers at night.
  2. Fixation of cap on the noise levels of loudspeakers.
  3. Prohibition of honking vehicles in residential areas at night.
  4. Spreading awareness about the hazardous effects of noise pollution.
  5. Directing the state to confiscate loudspeakers operating beyond permitted noise limits.

The environmental-pollution situation probably stands on a better legal platform than it did a couple of decades ago, but there is still a very long way to go in its implementation if we want to save the Earth in the face of alarming climate change statistics.

Prisoner’s Rights and Article 21

Fundamental Rights form the basis of human existence and are not denied to anyone except under special circumstances. A person convicted of a crime too, therefore, is not deprived of his Fundamental Rights. Restrictions are usually placed on a criminal’s movement, the practice of the profession, etc. but the Right to Life and Personal Liberty is one right that is not snatched from him, except through procedure established by law (for eg. a death sentence).

What constitutes the Right to Life and Personal Liberty of a convict? We shall examine that below.

Right to free legal aid

Article 39A of the Constitution provides that the State must secure a proper legal system based on the equal opportunity by offering free legal services to people (in the form of lawyers to represent them in a trial), in order to ensure that no one is denied justice due to his economic weakness. This is in consonance with Article 14 which provides equal protection before the law and Article 22(1) which states that every arrested person must get the chance to be represented by a legal practitioner of his choice.

Hence, this right helps to ensure one of the most essential elements of justice – that it is made accessible to all.

Right to a speedy trial

Right to speedy trial means that the accused should be put under trial as soon as possible to ascertain whether they are guilty or not. It safeguards against the accused being put into prison for a long time with no foreseeable date in the near future to face trial. It is available to the accused at all stages including investigation, inquiry, trial, appeal etc. This right is based on the principle which says that “justice delayed is justice denied.”

This right was discussed by the court in detail in the following case.

Hussainara Khatoon and Ors. v. Home Secretary, State of Bihar (1979)- Right to Speedy Trial for Under trials

Facts:

In this case, a petition for a writ of habeas corpus was filed by a number of undertrial prisoners who were in jail in Bihar for years, awaiting their trial.

Judgment:

The Supreme Court held that though the right to a speedy trial is not specifically listed as a Fundamental Right in the Indian Constitution, it is implicit in the broad scope of Article 21. Speedy trial is the essence of criminal justice and hence, no procedure which does not ensure a reasonably quick trial could be “reasonable, fair or just.” Thus, the Bihar Government was ordered to start the trials of the prisoners as soon as possible.

Right to fair trial

A fair trial is a trial characterised by the complete impartiality and fairness of judges during the hearings. What use is the trial for the accused if the people making the decisions are inherently biased towards them?

Every person undergoing a trial should be given a fair chance, so as to ensure the application of fundamental elements of human rights and proper administration of justice. It forms part of International Law as well, given under Article 10 of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights.

The qualitative difference between a speedy trial and fair trial

Speedy trial and fair trial are alienable elements of the judicial process and must go hand-in-hand for the best-possible administration of natural justice. Every party to a case has the right to get a reasonably quick dispersion of justice as well as fair treatment and decision by the court.

However, there does exist a qualitative difference between these two elements. Seen at face-value, we can say that the principle of fair trial holds dearer value in the judicial process, as its denial would mean a direct snatching of the person’s right to be properly examined before being declared guilty. Justice must not only be done but also clearly appear to be done, and hence, the principle of fair trial must be followed at all times.

Constitutionality of a death sentence

The death sentence is a type of punishment awarded to criminals who have committed the grossest or serious offences. Oxford Dictionary defines it as the “legally authorized killing of someone as punishment for a crime.” But, does that mean that the State can take the life of a person as per its will? Doesn’t that completely nullify the person’s Right to Life?

The constitutional validity of a death sentence has been much discussed and debated, with many arguing that it is inhumane, that it violates the Fundamental and Human Rights, or that the ‘eye for an eye’ ideology behind it achieves no purpose in law and justice.

Take a look at this landmark case.

Bachan Singh v. State of Punjab (1980)

Facts: 

In this case, Bachan Singh was convicted of the murders of three people and sentenced to death by the Sessions Judge, which was confirmed by the High Court. Bachan Singh appealed whether the facts of the case fell in the category of “special reasons” to warrant the death penalty.

Judgement: 

The court upheld the constitutional validity of the death penalty saying that it did not violate Articles 14, 19 and 21, but reiterated that it could only be awarded in the “rarest of rare” cases, and not as a substitute for life imprisonment.

Thus, while capital punishment is a very harsh punishment, it is essential in the grossest and most serious cases like the murder of several persons, a brutal rape, etc. to properly administer justice and act as a deterrent in society. Its constitutional validity has been upheld by the Supreme Court. However, a high burden must be placed on the judge to duly consider and be satisfied with the awarding of a death sentence.

Public hanging

Public hanging means the execution of a convict by hanging in a public space where the members of the general public are allowed to attend voluntarily. While today they are regarded with a general distaste, public executions used to be more commonplace earlier as they acted as a strong deterrent for others, showing the power of the State to deal with unfavourable elements of society.

In India, convicts have a Right against Public Hanging as part of their Fundamental Right to Life, due to the barbaric nature of such an execution. This was established in Attorney General of India v. Lachma Devi and Ors. (1985).

Attorney General of India v. Lachma Devi and Ors. (1985)

Facts: 

In this case, Lachma Devi set her daughter-in-law Pushpa on fire due to bad relations and dissatisfaction with the dowry brought by her, causing her death. She was sentenced to death by public hanging in a place like Ramlila Maidan by the Rajasthan High Court. An appeal was filed by her against this decision.

Judgement: 

The bench condemned public hanging as being unconstitutional and grossly violative of Article 21 of the Constitution, thus deleting that order of the High Court.

Thus, while a death sentence remains a method of punishment in the most serious crimes, it need not be taken to the extent of a public hanging to further humiliate the convict and cause turmoil in society.

Right against delayed execution

The Apex court has ruled that an unreasonable and undue delay in the execution of the sentenced person is akin to torture and is in violation of the Right to Life. The Supreme Court is further of the opinion that delay in execution is enough grounds for commuting the punishments to, say, a life sentence. This is because an unduly delayed execution means the distortion of proper justice and causes great psychological distress to the convict, which is unnecessary.

Police atrocities and custodial death 

Police are one of the most necessary institutions of a State as it is the acting arm of law and legislation. Police keep a check on unwanted activities and ensure order in society, for which it is given considerable powers. 

However, sometimes, certain members of the police get caught up in the power and try to take undue advantage of it. They cease to abide by the law and instead, take it in their own hands. It is a sad sight to see the very guardians of law compromising it – leading to cases of police brutality and atrocities.

Police officers sometimes unfairly arrest individuals, beat and torture the prisoners, and commit various other crimes. One example of such a situation was seen in Smt. Nilabati Behera Alias Lalita Behera v. State of Odisha and Ors. (1993).

Smt. Nilabati Behera Alias Lalita Behera v. State of Odisha and Ors. (1993)

Facts: 

In this case, the 22-year-old son of the petitioner was taken into police custody. The next day, his dead body was found on the railway tracks. The death was unnatural as the body was found with multiple injuries. The petitioner alleged custodial death.

Judgement:

The court confirmed the allegation and awarded compensation to the petitioner. It directed the state to ascertain the responsibility of the officials involved in the death and take appropriate actions against them. It upheld the Right to Life of accused under trials and persons in custody and the fact that no police official can deprive someone of their life and liberty without a lawful procedure.

Trial of rape cases

Rape is one of the most horrific crimes of all, and one of the few crimes for which no reason given can be considered justified by any member of society. Unfortunately, it is also a crime that threatens to never die in our country, with India being the most dangerous country for women according to a Thomson Reuters Foundation report in 2018. Government data says that over 90 rape cases are reported in the country every day – but the actual number is probably much higher.

Rape has remained a grossly under-reported crime, which can be attributed to the psychological stress and fear of ostracisation by society in the minds of victims and their families, and also to the long-drawn, painful and often unsatisfactory trial procedure. Over time, efforts have been made by the courts to enable dispersion of easier, quicker and greater justice to victims of rape.

It was in the brutal rape case of Delhi Domestic Working Women’s Forum v. Union of India (1995), that the court laid down parameters to assist the victims of rape in the trial process.

Delhi Domestic Working Women’s Forum v. Union of India (1995)

Facts:

In this case, a Public Interest Litigation was filed against the rape of six women travelling in a train from Ranchi to Delhi, by seven army personnel.

Judgement: 

The Court recognised the defects in the system where complaints are not handled properly and victims are often humiliated by the police and suffer grave psychological stress. The parameters laid down include-

  1. Provision of legal representation to the victims from the moment they arrive at the police station for the complaint, and the duty of the police to inform them of this right.
  2. Maintenance of anonymity of the victims as far as necessary.
  3. Establishment of Criminal Injuries Compensation Board to award compensation to victims even before conviction of offender takes place.

Prevention of sexual harassment of working women

When we think of a good life, it probably includes living with respect in the community without any unfavourable actions taken by others against you. However, in this patriarchal society, women are often treated as sexual objects meant for the pleasure of men, and it leads to unwanted sexual advances towards them. 

Women’s safety outside their homes has been one of the reasons why even in the urban areas in modern times, there is a dearth of women in the workspace. For a woman, the Right to Life includes the right to not face any sexual harassment while they go out to earn a living and achieve their professional goals – thereby enabling them to exercise their right of practising any profession, occupation or trade.

Keeping this issue in mind, various provisions have been ordered by the Court and implemented by the Government to prevent sexual harassment of women, which can be mainly credited to the following landmark case.

Vishaka and Ors. v. State of Rajasthan and Ors. (1997)- Right against Sexual Harassment

Facts: 

In this case, a writ petition was filed to prevent the hazards to the safety of working women in the wake of an alleged gang rape of a social activist in a Rajasthani village. It contended that sexual harassment faced by women in the workplace was in violation of the Fundamental Rights granted in Articles 14, 15 and 21.

Judgement:

The court defined sexual harassment and laid down certain guidelines for prevention of sexual harassment in the workplace, which include (but are not limited to) the following-

  1. Duty of employers and responsible people to prevent sexual harassment.
  2. Duty of employers to provide a safe and appropriate working environment for women.
  3. Establishment of a complaint committee (headed by a woman) and a complaint mechanism to redress grievances.
  4. Rules for disciplinary actions to be taken against misconduct.
  5. Spread of awareness regarding the rights of working women.

Eve-teasing

Unwanted remarks and advances towards women don’t just stop at closed professional or domestic settings. Unfortunately, they also occur in public places like trains, metros, and even streets, and this is known as Eve-teasing.

While eve-teasing has often been dismissed as harmless or less serious than other issues, it acts as a big blot on women’s safety and can lead to violent situations as well. 

Let’s examine the case of Dy. Inspector-General of Police and Anr. v. S. Samuthiram (2012), which led to the formation of guidelines to prevent and punish eve-teasing.

Dy. Inspector-General of Police and Anr. v. S. Samuthiram (2012)

Facts:

In this case, a police personnel eve-teased and misbehaved with a woman who was waiting with her husband at a bus station in Tamil Nadu.

Judgement: 

The guidelines laid down by the court include (but are not limited to) the following-

  1. All governments to ensure the presence of plain-clothed female police officers in public places.
  2. Installation of CCTV cameras in strategic locations.
  3. Orders to persons in-charge of public institutions and public service vehicles to immediately report any acts of eve-teasing to the police, failure of which would lead to adverse consequences.
  4. Establishment of Women Helpline in all states and union territories.

While noteworthy guidelines have been formulated by the court for both, sexual harassment and eve-teasing, the fact that these horrid practices still prevail questions the quality of their enforcement. One gets no points for observing that women’s safety is still a gigantic problem in our country, and it is the responsibility of law and order to buckle up and ensure that the unequally-placed half of the population gets the right environment to live and flourish, which has been long overdue.

Emergency and Article 21

Emergency refers to a situation where immediate action is required by the authorities in the State to deal with dangerous conditions involving internal rebellion, external aggression or financial bankruptcy. In India, an Emergency can be any of these three types-

  1. National Emergency
  2. Failure of Constitutional Machinery in a state (hence, President’s rule)
  3. Financial Emergency

In a situation of Emergency, the liberties of the people may be temporarily suspended, with the reasoning that the State needs to prevent mayhem and effectively cope with the dangerous situation. Article 359 of the Indian Constitution empowers the President to suspend the Fundamental Rights of the people given in Part III for a specific period of time. However, this is not without exceptions.

Article 21, granting the Right to Life and Personal Liberty, is one of the only two rights that can not be suspended by the authorities even in case of an Emergency. It says that no person is deprived of his life or personal liberty except through a procedure established by law, and this procedure must not be arbitrary or unreasonable (as recognised in the Maneka Gandhi case).

The fact that Article 21 cannot be suspended ensures that people are not exploited during times of stress and danger and that they still possess their basic and cherished human rights.

This provision of non-suspension of Article 21 was brought about by the 44th Amendment to the Constitution in 1978, which amended Article 359 to exclude Articles 20 and 21 from its scope.

Right to Education: A Fundamental Right under Article 21A

Life without education remains to be a mere animal existence, as it is education that broadens the horizons of a person’s mind, making him capable of not only earning a livelihood but also of achieving happiness and respect and making a mark for himself in the world. 

The Right to Education in India was added under Article 21A of the Indian Constitution by the Constitution (Eighty-Sixth) Amendment Act, 2002. This Article provides free and compulsory education to all children in the age group of six to fourteen years (6–14) as a Fundamental Right.

Two cases had an important bearing on the establishment of the Right to Education. We shall take a look at them below.

Miss Mohini Jain v. State of Karnataka and Ors. (1992)

Facts: 

In this case,  student of a Government Medical College in Karnataka was refused admission as she could not afford to pay the Rs. 60,000 capitation fee which was charged from the students not belonging to Karnataka. She filed a petition against this action.

Judgement: 

The High Court declared that it was illegal to charge capitation fee from students under any circumstances. Moreover, it acknowledged that education was what ensured a life of dignity and happiness to a person and not transforming the right to education mentioned under Article 41 of Part IV of the Constitution into a Fundamental Right would defeat its purpose and also keep all existing Fundamental Rights beyond the reach of the illiterate. Thus, it declared that Right to Education is a part of the Fundamental Rights.

Unni Krishnan, J.P. and Ors. Etc. v. State of A.P. and Ors.: Article 21(a)

Facts: 

The petition in this case was filed by certain educational institutions in Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Maharashtra and Tamil Nadu challenging the decision made by the court in the above case of Mohini Jain v. the State of Karnataka. They claimed that a person had the right to open an educational institution with a profit motive and if that institution was self-financed, then the quantum of fees charged by it would be the discretion of the institution and not the State.

Judgement: 

It was held that every Indian citizen has a Fundamental Right to Education. No person can be deprived of his or her education by the State. This right includes free education until the person attains 14 years of age and thereafter, it will depend on his or her personal economic capacity as well as that of the State.

It is clear that the recognition of Right to Education as a Fundamental Right was mainly brought about by the above-mentioned cases, which ultimately led to the Eighty-Sixth Amendment.

Conclusion 

The Right to Life and Personal Liberty has a wide ambit which is only growing over time. There has been increasing awareness about the various aspects of a person’s life which he or she is entitled to control and which would, thus, facilitate the enhancement in quality of his or her life. This Right has been described as the “heart and soul” of the Constitution of India by the Supreme Court and certainly proves to be so – representing the very basic necessities of human life.


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post Article 21: Meaning & Scope of Protection of Life & Personal Liberty appeared first on iPleaders.

Essential Stages Of Merger And Acquisition Under Corporate Law

$
0
0

The Article is written by Abhishek Dubey student of BBA LL.B second year. This article deals with the details about the essential stages of merger and acquisition transactions and the role of a different person, the reason for merger and acquisition, etc.

Introduction

Merger and Acquisition refers to combining the assets of two companies with a motive to increase the profits, to increase the competitive advantage and increase market share. A merger is an act in which one company absorbs the other company. An acquisition refers to the process when one company obtains the major stake in the target company but the name and legal structure of the company remains permanent.

Reasons for Merger and Acquisition

  • Synergies: When the merger between two or more companies happens, the         efficiency of companies increase and at the same time there is a reduction in cost because each company has rights and obligations towards the new company in terms of managing the company and contribution of capital. 
  • Growth: Merger can lead to the growth of the company. This gives an opportunity to the acquirer company to grow its share. For example, a beer company may choose to buy out a smaller competing brewery to sell it to a loyal customer base and produce more beer.
  • Increases supply chain power: Buying out a supplier and distributor is known as a vertical merger. Buying a supplier and distributor reduces the cost compared to before and it also helps in the easy distribution of products.
  • Eliminate competition: Many mergers and acquisitions deal with eliminating future competition and acquire a large market share. A lot of cost is required to convince the shareholders to accept the offer.
  • Surviving: It is difficult for companies to survive in the long run. So, during the financial crisis from 2008 to 2012, the only option left with the companies was to either merge or acquire in order to survive in the long run.

Essential Stages in Merger and Acquisition

Merger and Acquisition are the corporate strategies that deal with buying, selling and

combining different companies. But the decision of merger and acquisition is taken after analysis of various factors such as the current status of companies, the present market scenario and threats and opportunities. 

The success of the merger and acquisition depends on strategies followed by the company. Many big companies look for smaller companies to diversify or expand the business or for strengthening the research work. 

1. Merger and Acquisition Strategy Process

The merger and acquisition strategy process differs from company to company  Following is the strategy process which the company has to deal with:

    • Determination of business plans: The first step in finding out the strategy process is to find out the way to accelerate growth plans of the business through mergers and acquisitions. The factors considered for determining business plan is the geographical location of the business, the technology required to carry out the task, the risk factor, and other skills etc.
    • Finding out financial constraints: Another step required is to find out Financial constraints. The funds can be arranged through loans, cash, public, and private equities but the factor to be considered while meeting out financial need is risk associated with credit or cash or equity and also the easy availability of risk, returns to the amount.
    • Developing a summary profile of the acquiring company: The Next step is to make a profile of the acquiring company. Profile includes whether the company is private or public, investment bankers and investor and attorney, the recommendation of employees. 
    • Preliminary valuation: This stage deals with the cost and estimated returns through acquisition.
    • Rating of acquisition candidates on the basis of their impact on business and ranking them accordingly: This process will help in ranking the relative impact of the acquisition. 
    • Review and approve the strategy:  Now the process involves reviewing the merger and acquisition strategy and ensure that all the stakeholders of a company like the board of directors, members and investors are satisfied or not. If they are satisfied then the person can go-ahead with the merger and acquisition process.

2. Target identification strategies

Effective target identification is built on sound portfolio strategy. Companies need to ensure that target identification is based on solid research work. Companies that have done well research work have the opportunity to win and rise from the competitors.

The steps in target identification strategies are:

  • Identify potential segments: By conducting a comprehensive evaluation of the industry future sources of profit can be identified such as customer choices, dispersive technologies etc.
  • Developing a list of targets: Based on an interview with the company and market experts, the market segment in which the acquisition has the ability to create value can be recognized.
  • Growing a Business by merger or acquisition: The business grows through the merger and acquisition, if the existing business has these problem assets of the business are not properly utilized, poor management, the manager is willing to leave or retire, etc. 
  • Prioritize targets: These steps include the owner identifying the target business. When planning for a merger, finding out whether a person or company being merged will be able to to work with the target company or not and if there is acquisition, finding out the motive of the owner acquiring the target company.

3. Information Exchange

After initial stages go well, and both parties have agreed to go ahead for the transaction, the documentation process starts which includes submission of a letter of intent to officially express interest in the transaction and signing confidentiality of information to ensure that the proceedings of deal and discussion will not go out. After that, the entities share their information with each other like financial statements, history of the company etc. so that they can inform the shareholders about the position of the company.  

4. Valuation and Synergies 

After sharing information with each other, assessment of target and of the deal as a whole is done. The seller tries to find out what would be the good price that would result in shareholders gaining from the deal. It also tries to know what would be a reasonable offer for the target or purchaser of business. The buyer tries to assess the amount of benefit that they can derive in terms of reduction in cost, Increase in market power.

5. Offer and Negotiation

After valuation and assessment the offer is given to the shareholders of the target. The offer can be in cash or stock. The seller analyzes whether the offer is reasonable or not and tries to negotiate for a better price. This step requires a lot of time and at the same time it is very complex. There is a competition among the buyer to offer better prices when the business or entity which is being targeted is attractive there is a competition among buyer ,buyers offer different price.

6. Due Diligence

After the acceptance of an offer the due diligence process by the buyer begins. Due diligence includes a review of target entity including products, customer base, financial books, human resource etc. The objective is to ensure that information is correct based on which the offer was made. If the wrong information is provided then revision is done to justify the actual information.

7. Purchase Agreement

After everything goes well, now the next step is to draft the agreements which outline the cash or stock to be given to target shareholders. It would also include the time when the payment would be made to shareholders.

8. Deal closure and integration

After the purchase agreement, both parties close the deal by signing the document and the buyer acquires the target company. The management, teams, of both the entity works together for merging the entity.

https://lawsikho.com/course/certificate-course-in-advanced-civil-litigation-practice-procedure-and-drafting
             Click above

Regulation of Merger and Acquisition process

  1. The Companies Act 2013: Section 230 to 240 of the company act deals with mergers and acquisitions. Although a merger and acquisition is an agreement between two parties, the approval of the High Court is necessary for the transaction. Also, for the process of merger and acquisition, 3/4th of members and creditors should agree in the general board meeting. The law permits 210 days of going ahead for merger and acquisition and obligatory time for the claimant is 210 days before commencing of merger and acquisition transaction.
  2. Income Tax Act 1961: In case of slump sale and share sale and if the company is unlisted then tax deductible is 20 or 30 percent. In case of the share sale of the listed company, the company has to pay a rate of interest for 15 per cent depending upon the period of share held. And in amalgamation and demerger process where it involves the issuance of 3/4th of share then it is considered as tax-neutral no tax is deducted.
  3. Securities law: Any acquisition of share more than 25 per cent is considered as an open offer to public shareholders. And any merger and acquisition where the stock exchange is involved permission from NCLT and SEBI is required. 
  4. Foreign Exchange Regulations: Sale of equity share involving resident or non-resident is allowed, subject to the permission from R.B.I and sectoral caps in FDI policy. Any transaction involving the issuance of shares to non-resident shareholders doesn’t require permission from R.B.I.
  5. Competition Regulation: If acquisition exceeds certain limits as specified by the Competition Commission Of India, it would require permission from CCI.
  6. Indian Stamp Act 1899: The stamp duty is charged at the rate of 0.25 percent on the value of the share. And if the shares are in the dematerialized form then there is no stamp duty charge. In case of asset sale at the conveyance of assets and in case of demerger and amalgamation at a conventional rate.

Roles of different persons in the merger and acquisition process

  1. Investment Committee: It includes the CEO and senior-level executive and the failure and success of any transaction depend upon them.

The role of the investment committee are:

  • Ensure that the right person is in the right place and right team.
  • To maintain teamwork and discipline.
  • Maintaining long term goals of the organization.
  • Bringing objectivity and also that deal is done for good reason.
  • This group should involve the strategic process itself.
  1. Business Unit Leadership: Its role is critical but it is important to bring them. The role of this group includes:
  • Tracking competitors’ actions.
  • Effective leadership to ensure that due diligence process and integration process.
  • In smaller companies having an effective business, the unit can play an important role and this is because fewer employees having more workloads and different roles.

3.Corporate Development: The role of corporate development is very crucial in whole transaction. The role of this group includes:

  • Maintaining the pipeline of merger and acquisition transactions.
  • Monitoring of targets 
  • Preparing for negotiating and bidding.
  • Ensure that right capital available at the right time.

4.Transaction Lead:The role of this group will be at stage of integration and execution and  at documentation stage. The Role of This group include:

  • Finding out risk and challenges in transaction.and in transaction lead risk and challenges as well as opportunities can be better understood.
  1. External Advisor: Advisor role includes:
  • Augmentation of company’s current capabilities.
  • Providing needs as needed throughout the Merger and acquisition process.
  • Providing assistance .during targets.
  • Supporting negotiation, execution and due diligence.
  • Some companies prefer to have an external advisor on a case to case basis and some may prefer advisor from the start of the transaction.
  1. Role of Investment Banker: With increasing competition and expanding of merger and acquisition due to globalization, the role of an investment bank has become important. The company will need this because of advice on potential targets.

The main role of investment banker includes:

  • Establishing fair value of companies involved in the transaction.
  • Analyzing potential future of the company.
  • Determining the value of the share of the company with reference to the market.
  • They also represent potential acquirer.
  • Writing of selling memorandum.
  • The role of the investment bank ends as soon as the buyer purchases.
  • Provision of financing to purchase the business it will require money whether the money has to be financed through debt or offering a share to the shareholder. 

Conclusion

In an era of increasing competition due to globalization, merger and acquisition activity has increased. The form of new business includes joint ventures and investments through foreign direct investment and there are various reasons for companies being merged such as to avoid competition, growth and non-availability of capital. But sometimes the transaction of merger and acquisition become very critical.

References 


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skills.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post Essential Stages Of Merger And Acquisition Under Corporate Law appeared first on iPleaders.

What are the various Steps Involved in case of Amalgamation of two Banks?

$
0
0

This article is written by Saahil Sakordekar,  pursuing a Certificate Course in Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code from LawSikho.com. Here he discusses “What are the various Steps Involved in case of Amalgamation of two Banks?”.

Introduction

Amalgamation occurs when two companies combine to form a new entity. It is more likely that the two amalgamating companies are engaged in the same line of business. In the present scenario, the two companies will be banking companies. Amalgamation includes combining the assets and liabilities of the two banking amalgamating companies into one amalgamated company while also swapping shares based on their market value. An amalgamation of two banking companies increases their resources, thereby resulting in increased lending capacity. Some recent examples of amalgamation of banking companies are:

An amalgamation of Vijaya Bank (VB) and Dena Bank (DB) with Bank of Baroda (BoB).

The amalgamation of five of its associate smaller Public Sector Banks (PSBs) namely, State Bank of Bikaner and Jaipur, State Bank of Travancore, State Bank of Patiala, State Bank of Mysore and State Bank of Hyderabad with the State Bank of India (SBI).

What do the Acts say?

The amalgamation of two Banking Companies must be in accordance with the regulations that are largely laid down under Section 44A of the Banking Regulation Act, 1949. The procedure for the amalgamation of two Banking Companies is as follows:

  • The first step will be for the draft scheme of amalgamation to be scrutinized by the Board of Directors (BoDs) of their respective banks before they give their approval. In case of the Public Sector Banks, the appointment of the Board of Directors is governed by the Banking Companies (Acquisition and Transfer of Undertakings) Act, 1970.

In case of Private Sector Banks too, the draft scheme of amalgamation has to go through the vetting of the Board of Directors and get their approval in line with the Reserve Bank of India’s Master Direction for Amalgamation of Private Sector Banks, 2016

  • The second step for Private sector banks is to conduct a meeting of the shareholders of each of the banking companies. To bring such a meeting to fruition, the notice of the occurance of such meeting is given to every shareholder of the two banking companies. 

The notice has to be given in line with the relevant Articles of Association (AoA). The notice shall include the date, the time, the place and the object of the meeting. Moreover, the notice shall mandatorily be published once a week in at least two newspapers and this shall continue for a period of three weeks consecutively. Furthermore, the newspapers in which the Notice is published should have a circulation in the localities or locales where the registered offices of the banking companies are located. Also, one of these newspapers must be in the language understood by the people residing in the locality.

  • The third step for Private sector Banks involves placing the scheme of amalgamation before the shareholders of each banking company seperately. This scheme shall contain the terms and conditions of the amalgamation. It is a compulsory requirement under this section, that the scheme of amalgamation must be passed by the shareholders of each banking company, with a two-thirds majority. The shareholders can vote in person or by proxy at a meeting called especially for this purpose.

Public Sector Banks, on the other hand, take the resolution passed by their Board to the Union Cabinet and then the same has to be passed by both the houses of the Parliament. (Since the Government is the maximum stockholder in a Public Sector Bank)

In the aftermath of executing the above-mentioned steps, any shareholder who was against the idea of amalgamation of the banking companies and had thereby voted against the scheme of amalgamation at the meeting, or has given a notice in writing during the meeting or prior to the meeting in question, to the company concerned or the presiding officer at such a meeting that he disagrees with the scheme for amalgamation. If the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) ratifies the plans for the amalgamation, then such dissenting shareholder is entitled to rightfully claim from the banking company the value of the shares held by him in the banking company as determined by the RBI. So any amount determined by the RBI as to be the value of the shares held by the dissenting shareholder shall be absolutely final.

https://lawsikho.com/course/insolvency-bankruptcy-code-ibc-nclt-sarfaesi

Click Above

Therefore, as per my understanding, a shareholder who’s aggrieved and not in agreement with the amalgamation can take concrete steps to register his protest, like voting against it, giving notice during the meeting whereby the RBI will determine the value of his/her holdings and give them an out. But, the decision of the RBI with regards to the monetary figure is absolute and not appealable.

If a sizeable majority of two-thirds of the shareholders are in favour of the amalgamation, then the amalgamation is approved according to this section (Section 44) of the Banking Regulation Act. It shall then be forwarded to the RBI for its ascent. The RBI on its part would then grant the requisite permission for amalgamation if it so deems fit, by an order in writing. This order once passed. Shall be binding on the banking companies and it’s shareholders.

Once the plan for amalgamation is okayed by the RBI, by virtue of the order the property and liabilities of the two amalgamating banking companies shall vest in the newly formed banking company.

Was the Section Amended?

The Banking Laws (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act, 1963 amended Section 44A of the Banking Regulation Act, 1949 so as to add some subsections after sub-section 6. One may ask as to what purpose the amendments fulfil when it comes to the amalgamation process. Well, the amendments lay down guidelines if you please, to be followed in certain scenarios like:

Where the deal for amalgamation has been greenlit by the RBI, the regulatory body may through order in writing convey that on so and so dating the amalgamated banking company will cease to function and shall stand dissolved.

Where the RBI does direct for the dissolution of the amalgamated banking company, the RBI shall send a copy of the order to the Registrar before whom the Banking company was registered and on receipt of such an order the Registrar shall strike off the name of the company as per the standard procedure.

According to subsection 6C, an order by the RBI under the above-mentioned sub-section 4 of section 44A whereby the RBI passes an order in writing ratifying the amalgamation, such order will be conclusive evidence of the banking companies having fulfilled all the requirements for amalgamation under the section. The order holds irrespective of whether it was passed before the commencement of section 19 (the amendments) of The Banking Laws (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act, 1963.

Note- The Act categorically mentions that nothing in the provisions of section44A of the Banking Regulation Act, 1949 will hinder the power of the Central Government in orchestrating the amalgamation of two or more banking companies under section 396 of the previous Companies Act, 1956 or under section 237 of the current Companies Act, 2013.

However, it comes with a proviso that the Central Government shall exercise this power only in consultation with the RBI. The Central Government cannot take a unilateral decision.

Has the RBI framed rules for amalgamation?

In 2016, the RBI exercised the powers conferred on them by Section 35 to section 44 of the Banking Regulations Act, 19449 and issued directions for amalgamation of Private Sector Banks known as ‘Master Direction’. The provisions of these directions will be applicable to all private sector banks licensed to operate in India by the RBI and to the Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs) registered with the RBI.

While a majority of the directions are in coherence with Section 4A of the Banking Regulation Act, 1949 there are a few anomalies like:

In case of amalgamation of Private Sector Banks, the meeting of the shareholders is called only after the draft scheme of amalgamation is vetted and approved by the Board of Directors (BoDs) of the two banking companies seperately (as stated earlier). This wasn’t the case earlier. It seems that the banks could directly call for a meeting of the shareholders.

Among the directions is a Schedule which contains an entire list of documents required to be furnished along with the application for amalgamation.

Conclusion

Hence, one can conclude that that the steps involved in the amalgamation of two private sector banking companies are moderately straightforward rather than tediously complicated if one follows the letter of the law to the hilt. On the contrary, the amalgamation of public sector banks seems like a long drawn process which requires the Government in power to have the required numbers in both the houses of the Parliament. Also, there is a need to manage Human Resource properly for the successful operation of the amalgamation process. Ideally, the employees of the amalgamating banks would be integrated into the amalgamated bank. However, taking everyone on board may not always be possible. Then there is the matter of not causing inconvenience to the customers of the amalgamating banks while the process is being carried out. All in all, every stakeholder has to be taken into consideration.


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post What are the various Steps Involved in case of Amalgamation of two Banks? appeared first on iPleaders.

An Insider Insight to International Moot Court Competition

$
0
0

This article is written by Karishma Ramchiary*, a 4th-year student of B.A. LL.B. from Lloyd Law College, Greater Noida. The article discusses the Insider insights of International Moots along with the requisite documentation & formalities.

Introduction

There is no denial of the fact that participating in Moot Court Competitions is one important co-curricular activity for law students. As to what is Mooting and why should a student participates in it, you may look up to articles on the internet. I may refer you to the website of the University of Oxford that answers the question.

Mooting in India reflects competitive, individualistic and adversarial perspectives of the judicial side of law.1 Mooting culture in India that have been developed to a great extent. Every month at least two moot Court competitions happen in India. Students from Law Schools all over India prepare to participate in these competitions.

However, a National Moot Court Competition is in a way different from the International Moot Court Competition, right from the type of preparation to its presentation in front of the judge. Apart from the Memorial Drafting and Preparing for your oral arguments, International Moot Court Competition will require you to research the type of country you are visiting, raising funds to participate in case you are selected and several other important documentation such as passports and visas, etc. What goes on the preparation of the International Moot Court Competition is discussed in this article.

Subject Matter and Various Aspects of the International Moot Court Competition

International Moot Court Competitions are based on International Law. It is generally based on the specific branch of International Law or on a mixture of two or three branches of International Law. Some branches of International Law are International Criminal Law, International Environment Law, International Humanitarian Law, International Trade Law, etc.

The Moot Problem of the Competition is based on these topics or several issues connected with it. For example, International Criminal Court Moot Competition specifically deals with the International Criminal Law and the moot is organized yearly or Stetson International Environmental Moot Court Competition that specifically deals with International Environment law and is also organized yearly.

Each specific Moot Court Competition has its own rules and regulations. Therefore, any student interested in a particular Moot Competition should go through the Rules and Regulations before deciding to participate in it. It is also advisable to take inputs from other members of those who have participated in that competition before.

Mooting Competitions involve writing the memorandum and oral hearings based on the memorandum. Both writing the memorandum and oral hearings requires rigorous legal research and practice.

Cracking the Moot Problem of International Moot Court Competition need rigorous research and time. Therefore, moot teams in International Moot Competition are given three to six month for preparation, unlike National Moot Court Competitions which generally gives one to three months for preparation. 

There are Moot Court Competitions based on International Law that are organized inside India. To mention some, 1) D.M Harish Memorial International Moot Court Competition, 2) Justice P.N. Bhagwati International Moot Court Competition, 3) NUALS International Maritime Law Arbitration Competition, 4) VIPS International Law Moot Court Competition, 5) NALSAR Public International Law Moot Court Competition.

Other International Law Moots generally involve National or Regional Rounds and International Rounds. Whereas, others involve the selection of memorials before participation in Oral Rounds, therefore, understanding the rules and regulations is important for every Moot Competition.

https://lawsikho.com/course/diploma-entrepreneurship-administration-business-laws

Click Here

Top ten International Law Moot Court Competition

Phillips C. Jessup International Moot Court Competition

“The Jessup is one of those incredibly rare experiences that transcends law school and impacts your life for decades thereafter. It will undoubtedly provide you with the skills necessary to become a great lawyer, but it is the Jessup competition’s teaching of reason, civility, empathy, compromise and respect for others which will make you a better person and the world a better place.”- Mark Luz

I had the opportunity to participate in Jessups India’s Rounds- 2016 and I feel the above quotation fits perfectly with my Jessup experience. This Competition is known as the World Cup in Mooting.

It is the world’s largest moot court competition, with participants from roughly 700 law schools in 100 countries and jurisdictions.

 An interesting fact about Jessups is that the topic of the Moot Problem is announced several months before (i.e., in the month of March- April) the actual moot problem is out. That makes it better to deal with the questions in the Moot Problem because you get to learn your basics beforehand. Participants may refer to the Guide to Philip Jessup Moot published by CIICJ for some guidance to prepare for this Competition.

Time Period of the moot 

The Moot Problem releases by September and the Registration for the Moot ends by November.

To know more about this competition you can visit on its official web page

Stetson International Environmental Competition 

The World’s most prestigious moot on International Environmental Law Moot. This moot is organized by Stetson University, in India, it is sponsored by Surana & Surana International Attorneys and is hosted by Jindal Global Law School, Sonipat, Haryana. The International Finals of this moot is held in Gulfport, Florida. A team from National Law School, Bangalore won this Competition last year.

Time Period of the moot 

The registration for this moot ends in November. To know more about this Competition you can visit its official web page.

Willem C. Vis International Commercial Arbitration Moot

The goal of this moot is to foster the study of International Commercial Law and Arbitration for resolution of international business disputes through its application to a concrete problem of a client and to train law leaders of tomorrow in methods of alternative dispute resolution.

This moot specifically focuses on transactions that are related to the sale or purchase of goods under the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and other international commercial law involving the element of arbitration of dispute under specified Arbitration Rules.

It is organized by the Association for the Organization and Promotion of the Willem C. Vis International Commercial Arbitration Moot (Verein zur Veranstaltung und Förderung des Willem C. Vis International Commercial Arbitration Moot) and is held in Vienna.  A sister moot competition of this moot is the Vis moot (East) which is a different moot competition based on the same problem and is held in Hong Kong. 

There is no National Rounds for this moot, however, the organizers of this moot also encourage participation in pre-moots. The list of the pre-moots is provided on its official website. Several pre moots are organized by different countries to give the teams an opportunity to practice for the moot. 

In India, this year’s pre-moot is organized by O.P. Jindal Global University, India on 29 February – 1 March 2020. Participating in this moot may open up scholarship opportunities from universities.

Time Period of the moot 

The moot problem releases by October and the Registration for this moot ends by November- December. For more information on this moot, you can visit its official web page.

International Criminal Court Competition

This moot is a replica of the proceedings of the International Criminal Court. The moot problem is specifically based on fundamental issues of substantive and procedural aspects of international criminal law. It is organized by the Grotius Centre for International Legal Studies and is held annually in May at the Hague, the Netherlands.  The final round is expected to take place in an actual ICC courtroom with ICC judges adjudicating. The national rounds for India is organized by the National Law University of Delhi. 

Time Period of the Moot

The registration of the moot begins by September and ends by November. To know more about this moot you can visit its official web page.

Henry Dunant Memorial Moot Court Competition

This moot aims to promote awareness and understanding of International Humanitarian Law among the law students and the law faculties in India. It was started in the year 2001, by the Indian Society of International Law. In 2005, this moot was expanded by organizing a regional competition in South Asia. Nowadays, this moot is organized by the Indian Society of International Law in collaboration with the International Committee of the Red Cross (ICRC). The Competition is held at ISIL, Delhi in the month of October- November.

Time Period of the moot.

The Moot Problem of this moot releases and the registration starts in the month of June-July. Keep yourself updated about the moot on its official website.  

Foreign Direct Investment International Arbitration Moot

The Foreign Direct Investment Arbitration Moot is organized by the Centre for International Legal Studies. This moot focuses on international investment, the proliferation of international investment treaties, domestic legislation, and international investment contracts.

The dispute involves arbitration between host states and foreign investors and refers to internationalized procedures (e.g. ICSID) for resolving related disputes. The regional rounds of South Asia are held in New Delhi. The Regional Rounds of this moot involves writing a skeleton brief on the case provided, unlike other moots that require writing a memorial. The writing of the memorandum phase in this moot is for the International Rounds. Teams participating in this moot can also take part in several pre-moots.

The Time Period of the moot.

The moot problem releases in the month of February and the registration starts from January. To know more about this moot you can visit its official web page

Price Media Law Moot Court Competition

The aim of this moot is to foster and cultivate the freedom of expression issues and the role of the media and information technologies in societies around the world. It is hosted by Bonavero Institute of Human Rights in the Faculty of Law at the University of Oxford. Last year, the South Asian Rounds of the Competition was hosted by the Centre for Communication Governance at the National Law University, Delhi.

The regional rounds involve qualification on the basis of Memorial before the oral hearings. This moot claims for being more than just a moot as the organizers also host and conducts workshop on current topics concerning international media law.

The Time Period of the moot.

The moot problem releases by the month of May and the registration of the moot ends by the month of July. To know more about this moot you can visit its official web page.                              

Nelson Mandela World Human Rights Moot Court Competition

The Nelson Mandela World Human Rights Moot Court Competition is the world moot on human rights. It is co-organized by the Centre for Human Rights, University of Pretoria, the Academy on Human Rights, Washington College of Law, American University and the United Nations Human Rights Council Branch (HRCB) at the Office of the High Commissioner for Human Rights. It is held in Palais des Nations, in Geneva, Switzerland.

The case of the Competition involves issues on current human rights- ranging from human rights and artificial intelligence, over terrorism and mercenaries, right to not discriminate against on grounds of sexual orientation and gender identity. The winners of this Competition are offered to participate in a fully-funded three-week summer program at the University of Lucerne.

The participants of this moot shall submit heads of arguments on the case provided that would be assessed by the experts. Based on the assessment, Top 50  teams would be selected to participate in the oral hearings of the competition.

Time period of the moot

The moot problem releases in the month of February and the registration of the moot ends by the month of April. To know more about this moot you can visit its official web page.

Manfred Lachs Space Law Moot Court Competition

This moot is based on International Space Law. It is organized by the International Institute of Space Law (IISL). The moot offers a unique experience on issues related to international space law. The World Finals competition takes place within the framework of the IISL’s annual Colloquium, which is a contained event in the International Astronautical Congress held on a different continent each year.

The Asia-Pacific Regional Rounds of the Competition, this year shall be hosted by the Beijing Institute of Technology, China. Teams would be selected to compete in the oral Regional Rounds after the evaluation of their Written Submission.

Time Period of the moot.

The moot problem releases by the month of August and the registration ends by the month of January. To know more about this moot you can visit on its official website.

Leiden-Sarin Air Law Moot Court Competition

Teams interested in International Air Law should apply for this moot. This moot is organized by the International Institute of Air and Space Law of Leiden University and the co-founder of the competition, the Sarin Memorial Legal Aid Foundation from India.

For this year, the organizers have collaborated with East China University of Political Science and Law (ECUPL), the Shanghai International Arbitration Center (SHIAC) and China Eastern. This year the moot will be held in Shanghai, China. The Indian Rounds of the competition will be held at the Army Institute of  Law, Mohali on 1st February 2020.

The Time Period of the Moot 

The moot problem releases in the month of  September and the registration process of the moot ends by October. To know more on the Moot you can visit its official web page

moots

Challenges of International Moot Court Competition

While you prepare for your Competition, you may face several challenges. Problems such as the various things that need to be managed for the Competition and other related things required in this type of Competition are explained below. Handling such a competition is quite a balanced art. You will be required to do a lot of work right from administrative work (administration of the team) to research work for the competition. 

Management during the Competition

In Moot Court Competition, the team will require to draft memorials and prepare for oral arguments. There are many sites that you may check on the internet on how to prepare for the Competition. You can communicate or may if so, with the past participants for their insight on the competition and the amount of work that the competition requires. It may clear your idea and help the team in planning for the competition.

While in the process of preparing for these, several things might come your way. Management of the competition with your team, your mentor or even with yourself is an important task. 

With your Team

Generally teams comprised of three members or in some cases even more. As each individual different from the others, your working styles and techniques will vary. However, your goal is to draft one memorial from both sides as you will present your arguments as a team in the oral hearing. Therefore, realizing that only by working together, you will achieve the goal.

Communication with your team members clearly and efficiently on matters related to the process of the competition is important. Questions on how you will work towards your goal, Who will do which work? etc. needs to be discussed among the team members. Disputes are bound to arise while you work together. Settling the dispute or finding solutions to your problems amicably and logically is the only way to work forward.

With your Mentor

In International Moot Court Competitions, generally, a team is assigned with a mentor. The mentor may be anyone appointed by the College Administration. He/She may guide you in drafting memorials or in your preparation for oral hearings. Team members should maintain a cordial relationship as he/she will guide you throughout your work in the Competition.  Mentors are restricted from drafting the memorial or in any case be directly involved in drafting the memorial. His/ Her role is to help and direct the team.

He/She is also the link between the team and the College Administration. The Team, therefore, should have efficient communication about the execution of their mooting work with the mentor, so that he/she can guide them in the best possible way. 

With Yourself

Managing yourself and your own activities such as your course curriculum with the Moot Court Competition is another task. Sometimes, preparing for the Competition might take your whole day or week. The task is that you cannot leave behind your study and attach yourself only with the Competition, therefore you will have to dedicate your day both for your studies and Competition.

Another, Important thing for a law student is internships. Maintaining every aspect of your personal and professional life would be a real task to maintain. Therefore, to function, schedule your own task accordingly with the Competition.

With your exams

What will you do when the date of your exam and the day of the Competition collides? 

Prevention is better than cure, therefore, it is most advisable that you don’t take up moot competition that is likely to clash with your exam dates or else you will have to choose between the two. It’s a tough decision because exams are important so that you do not leave behind in the course of your study.

And since you have worked hard on the competition, you might not want to leave it as well. While, in this situation, the team needs to be careful and analyze the situation at hand and decide on a consensus among the Team Members and the College Administration. 

My team had faced such situations last year, where we got selected to participate in a competition to be held in Amsterdam. Our exam dates clashed with the day of the Competition. While the Competition was from 9-10th of May 2019, our semester exams started on the 11th of May, 2019. We decided to participate in the competition with the permission of the College Administration and not attend the first exam.

We resumed ourselves to attend the exam from the next one. From my experience, I can say that those were really hectic days. 

In such situations, it is important to weigh both your exams and the moot and decide in the most logical way from where you will benefit your cause. ‘

Other Important Things for participating in the Competition

Participating in the Moot Court Competition is a unique experience where you can learn several skills right from legal research, memorial drafting, team management, time management, and several others. Your knowledge on the subject matter involved would broaden, you will able to identify contemporary issues as moot problems are generally based on new rising issues. 

Fund Raising

Raising Funds may be tough, but it is one of the things you may learn in your International Moot Court Competition because it requires a large sum of money. Money for Registration, Travel, and Accommodation. Organizers generally provide accommodation for the duration of the moot competition. Through this process, you will learn about fundraising and project management. 

Teams may have to raise funds on their registration or travel fees especially flight tickets. Each specific Moot Competition has different funding rules. Any team should be clear about this issue before their decision to participate in the competition. Otherwise, it may be a huge obstacle in your way. 

To deal with this issue, your first step should be to look up the rules of the Fundraise in that particular competition. In some cases, the organizers may fund or at least help you find a way to fund yourself while some organizers may not. 

The second step of the fundraising issue would be to seek out help from the institution itself. Talk to your college administration and request them to fund you. They may help you with the issue. In circumstances when both steps do not meet your goal of fundraising, other steps that you can take would be to seek out help from organizations or corporations that might help you.

For example, if your moot is based on International Humanitarian Law, the team may seek out fund help from the International Committee of the Red Cross; Arbitralwomen provide support to teams who participate in dispute resolution competition. To get support from any organizations or corporations your application file needs to be strong that it gets accepted from them.  If your application is good enough, you may be lucky to find support from the organizations or corporations. The team may also reach out to people who may support them through crowdfunding. You may create a post on crowdfunding websites such as Milaap or ImpactGuru or Ketto etc. 

Passport, Visa, Travel Insurance & Accommodation

Another most important thing for the travel is having a passport and visa.

Getting your passport in your hand may sometimes take a long time, therefore you will need to apply for a passport at least 6 months before your Competition. You can apply for a passport in the Passport Seva Website. Take note that it is really a rigid process and it may be hard to get a passport faster. 

Last year,  I went through a hectic process to get my passport. I did not had a passport and I applied for just 6 months before my Competition (My team was selected to participate in the International Migration and Refugee Law Moot held at Amsterdam). I had to go to the Ghaziabad Passport Seva Kendra at least 3 times and at two Police Stations for Police Verification (You generally need to get it verified by one Police Station but in my case, since I am a student from a different State and applied passport on my Present Address, therefore, I had two verifications, one from Home and the other from the Present Address). This can take time and therefore apply for it as soon as possible if you are participating in an International Moot Court Competition.

Visa is another documentation that you need for your travel. It may also take time. Before applying for visa, check about the visa policies of the country you are visiting for your competition as you may need to apply for a visa beforehand in most countries while, some may have the policy of visa-in-arrival. Giving a visa is a decision of the embassy or consulate, you have no control over that decision.

Therefore, make sure that you make no mistakes while applying for it. Get all your documents needed for the visa application, for example, a letter from the organization, details about your accommodation, flight tickets, etc. Apply for it as early as possible.

Travel Insurance is necessary for the time period of your stay in another country. You will also need to submit travel insurance for your visa application. Some websites that you may visit for your international travel insurance are- i). Bajaj Allianz Travel Insurance, ii) Apollo Munich Travel Insurance, iii) ICICI Lombard Travel Insurance, etc. 

Accommodation for the number of days you stay is another necessary thing. While organizers may accommodate you for the days of the competition. In case they do not or in case you extend your stay to explore the places around, you need to book your stay early. Who knows it may get high on your budget if you don’t?

Conclusion 

When your Competition is over, you can ponder over questions on How was your experience? What did you learn? How will you go ahead? etc. Regardless of whether you win or lose, the competition, Mooting experience will leave you with a vast source of knowledge on the subject you mooted and several skills such as advocacy skills, public speaking skills, etc. that you gathered while participating in the Competition. Competing in a Moot Court Competition is both a personal and professional experience.

You will gain new experience meeting new people with diverse backgrounds and cultures. Mooting is also a platform where you can meet the experts of the field you are interested in, as “Academicians”, “Lawyers” and “Judges” are the ones who are called to judge in the Competition. Several International Moot Court Competition also has scholarship policies and programmes for higher studies. In such a manner, your experience can create opportunities for you. 

So grab these opportunities while it lasts. 

All the Best!!

References

1.http://docs.manupatra.in/newsline/articles/Upload/ACD19621-8BDB-48FF-8DF6-80B53499A119.pdf

2.https://www.lawctopus.com/jessup-international-moot-court-competition-2019/

3.https://www.ilsa.org/about-jessup

4.https://vismoot.pace.edu/site/about-the-moot

* The author has participated in International Migration and Refugee Law Moot Court Competition 2019 and will participate in Jean Pictet Competition 2020. She has also participated in National Rounds of Jessups Moot Court Competition 2018 and FDI Moot 2017 and has written this article on the basis of her Mooting experience.


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post An Insider Insight to International Moot Court Competition appeared first on iPleaders.

Key Changes Introduced by the Code on Industrial Relations Bill 2019

$
0
0

This article is written by Asgar Ali, pursuing a Diploma in Industrial and Labour Laws from LawSikho.com. Here he discusses “Key Changes Introduced by the Code on Industrial Relations Bill 2019”.

Introduction

On 28th November 2019, with an aim to codify 44 central labour laws into four broad codes as well as to increase India’s appearance over Ease of doing business, the Labour and Employment Minister, Shri Santosh Kumar Gangwar introduced the Labour Code on Industrial Relations 2019 in the Lower House of Parliament. This code will be combining three major acts i.e. The Trade Unions Act, 1926, The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, and The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946.   

Codifying 44 central labour laws is a big reform in labour law statutes because once it has happened then Labour laws shall be simplified and easy to comply. In fact, by amalgamating these total 44 labour laws in four major codes, the Central government is moving towards improving Social security aspects and accepting the recommendations of 2nd National Commission of labour. 

 There shall be the following arrangement of amalgamating existing labour laws:  

Sr. No. 

New Labour Code 

Existing labour laws to be subsumed

1

The Code on Social Security, 2019 

Laws related to social security, i.e. the Employees’ Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, the Employees’ State Insurance Corporation Act, the Employees’ Compensation Act, the Building and Other Construction Workers Act and the Maternity Benefits Act etc. 

2

The Labour Code on Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditions

Several industrial safety and welfare laws i.e. the Factories Act, the Dock Workers (Safety, Health and Welfare) Act and the Mines Act etc. 

3

The Code on Wages, 2019 

The Minimum Wages Act, the Equal Remuneration Act, the Payment of Wages Act and the Payment of Bonus Act etc. 

4

The Labour Code on Industrial Relations, 2019

The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, the Trade Unions Act, 1926 and the Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946 shall be combined 

 

In this article, the focus has been given to major changes as introduced in the Labour Code on Industrial Relations, 2019 and its importance. The details of these changes are mentioned as follow: 

Change no. 1Introduction of fixed-term contract:  

The 1st major change is the provision of allowing companies to hire workers on fixed-term contract up to any duration. The explanation of fixed-term contract is that a worker can be hired for any of duration which may be of three months / six months / twelve months (one year) depending on the seasonal requirements or availability of orders with that company. 

Necessity of this change:  

1. For the Benefits of Industries

 

 

  1. The provision of hiring workers on fixed- terms basis shall boost the growth of manufacturing and service sector especially to leather industries, food industries, Sugar and beverage factories, textile market, entertainment industries etc. Such sectors cannot run smoothly throughout the years due to their unstable working nature and survival of such industries usually depend upon public demand, timely Supply of goods/ services, market condition and most importantly, the availability of resources on time. 
  2. Now, the companies can achieve their short term targets due to easy availability of fixed term employees without the fear of any legal obligation such as giving notice period to such employees or any extra money in lieu of retrenchment compensation. Under such provisions, now the expiry of any labour employment contract due to the expiry of fixed term contract shall not be understood retrenchment.    
  3. The ease of doing business campaign shall be successful because now employer has the choice to hire talented manpower for a specific required time period. Now, the planning of budget, resources management i.e. procurement of talented manpower, raw material, appropriate equipment, power, land, infrastructure shall be easier for an employer which shall uplift the manufacturing sector and shall be profitable for both supplier and customer. 

2. For the Benefits of Workers:

 

 

  1. In Fixed-term employment, there shall be a direct contract between employee and employer, So the involvement of contractor as Middleman or commission agent shall be disappeared. This provision shall be helpful for a worker enabling him to get his hard earned money full ( i.e. without any commission charge of Contractor or Middleman) 
  2. The fixed-term worker/employees shall get all statutory and licit benefits on a par with the regular workers/ employees who are already doing work of similar nature

My Viewpoint 

  1. In India, there are 40 crore labourers who are working in the unorganised sector while the number of labourers in the organised sector is only five-six crore. In the present time, there is an urgent need to promote labour reforms by introducing provisions like fixed-term employment because such provisions shall be helpful to increase the flow of talented workforce from unorganised sector to organised sector and the difference shall be minimised.
  2. A talented worker (in true sense, a “work-doer”), whether he works in an organised sector or unorganised sector whether he is a blue-collar worker or a white-collar worker, he does not want to keep himself locked for a long period with his existing employer due to his high professional skill set. Today, every talented work-doer wants the best remuneration and the concept of fixed-term contract shall provide him with a platform to evaluate himself in terms of money earning in lieu of his services offered. This concept shall trigger him to learn new and to keep him updated as per his job requirements. Every high talented Work- Doer whether he is a fitter, a designer, a welder, a painter, a moulder, an engineer, a doctor, an actor, an artist, a teacher, a pleader, a writer, a player, a driver, an operator, a clerk, a consultant or a work-doer of any profession wants growth in his career based upon “More Learning – More Earning”. This is the ground reality and in today’s market, there is a need for fixed-term service contracts. 

Change no. 2 – The Concept of the Adjudicating Authority and Industrial Tribunal have been redefined:

Now, The Code has redefined the constitution of Industrial Tribunals for the settlement of industrial disputes and speedy disposal of labour-related cases. Here and now, in place of one member, there shall be a provision of setting up of two members’ tribunal. These two members shall be as follow:

  1. A Judicial Member:  the person who has served as High Court Judge of any state or a District Judge or an Additional District Judge for a minimum duration of three years. 
  2. An Administrative Member, who has more than 20 years of professional experience in the fields of labour laws, business laws, economics, public affairs, finance, commerce or labour relations etc. 

Change no. 3:

The third major change is the provision of “recognition of negotiating trade union” under which there is a requirement of 75 % those workers’ support that shall be on the muster rolls of that establishment for making a trade union and negotiating with the employer in that establishment. 

Earlier there was no such law at national level for recognition of trade union, though some states like Maharashtra (Maharashtra Recognition of Trade Unions and Prevention of Unfair Labour Practices Act, 1971), West Bengal (West Bengal Trade Unions Rules, 1998), Orissa (Orissa verification of Membership and Recognition of Trade Union Rules, 1994 ) and Kerala (Kerala Recognition of Trade Unions Act, 2010 ) have ratified the legal provisions for the recognition of trade unions in the territory of their respective states. But, now this principle is applicable throughout India. 

Under this provision, In case there are more than one Trade Unions of workers in any industrial establishment then only one Trade Union shall be designated as a sole negotiating union which keeps support of 75 % or more workers on the muster roll in that establishment and in case, no any Trade Union has such support strength on the muster roll of that establishment then a negotiating council shall be constituted for negotiation.

The employer cannot show partiality or favours to anyone or any specific trade union among many trade unions registered within that organisation. Such behaviour of an employer shall be understood as unfair labour practice. The new Code proscribes owners, labours and trade unions from committing any unfair labour practices listed in the Second Schedule of the Code.

Trade unions: Under the provisions of this new Code, any seven or more than seven members of a trade union are eligible to apply for registration by subscribing their names. On the date of filing application for registration of such trade union, at least 10% of the workers or 100 workers whichever is less shall be registered.  Additionally, for a registered trade union, there must be a member of a minimum seven workers who are employed in the industry or connected thereto. The Concerned State government or central Government may recognise that trade union. 

Change no. 4 – Provisions related lay off and retrenchment:

This labour code has retained the threshold on the worker count at 100 for prior government approval before Retrenchment, but it has a provision for changing ‘such number of employees’ through notification

The new Code describes the term “lay-off” as the powerlessness of an employer by reason of unavailability of coal/oil / Power or any such equipment failure/ breakdown which affects normal employment work of a worker.  This shortage/ no availability is also considered the major cause of no work and provides a ground to terminate the services of a worker by the employer which is said as “retrenchment”. Industrial establishments i.e. mines, plantations or factories where at least hundred (100) workers are required to take prior approval of concerned state or central government before such closure i.e. lay-off/retrenchment etc. The Union Cabinet has accepted the demands of various trade unions and worker bodies to keep this threshold numbers as 100 workers instead of 300. Though, the central or state government holds the right to modify this threshold number of workers by gazette notification any time.  There is a provision of the penalty of Rupees one up to ten lakh who contravenes this provision. 

https://lawsikho.com/course/labour-law-hr-managers

Click Above

There are some mandatory provisions related to retrenchment or layoff that any Industrial establishments wherever 50 to 100 workers are working or get employed, it shall be mandatory to the employer to :

  1. Such workers shall be given at least one month’s notice in writing mentioning the reason for retrenchment;
  2. Payment of fifteen days salary i.e. 50% of basic wages plus applicable dearness allowance to such a worker who has been retrenched /laid off from his employment;
  3. The retrenched person shall be given preference over another person in case new vacancies of same nature get arise in that factory/establishment or organisation.

Change no. 5:

The fifth major change is the provision of setting up of a “re-skilling fund” for the training of retrenched workers/employees. The retrenched employee would be paid 15 days’ wages from the re-skilling fund within 45 days of the date of retrenchment.

However, in this bill, the provisions regarding “retrenchment” is not clear which always has created the industrial disputes between employer and workers. Such unclear provisions related to retrenchment may affect the execution by central and state government.                

Change no. 6 – Modification in Concepts of Strikes and Lock-outs

The definitions of Strikes and Lock-outs have been redefined. In strikes, the concept of Public Utility Services has been removed. Now the code has made mandatory to serve a notice of 14 days for strikes by trade unions and lockouts by the employer in any Industrial establishment. Under the provisions of this new code, now mass casual leaves has also been taken within the ambit of the strike. Here, an employer is also bound to serve a notice to his workers before 14 days of lockout. The purpose of redefining this clause is to forbid strikes and lockouts in any factory, company or industrial establishment without giving prior notice of at least fourteen days and also during that time when the conciliation proceedings are pending. 

Benefits of these changes to Industries and Workers

Strikes and lock-outs are far beyond to the personal growth of a common person who is fighting for his/her survival and it is the violation of his/ her “Right to Work”.  It gives a negative effect on those workers and employers who do not want to stop their routine work. Since a long time, strikes and lock-outs are seen as unfair labour practices. As the new code is discouraging such activities so hopefully the industrial relations shall be improved and we shall be able to improve our ranking in World Bank’s Ease of Doing Business Index. 

Change no. 7 – Provisions of empowering government officers to settle Industrial Disputes:

The government officers have been empowered to adjudicate the disputes related to employers and trade unions and they have the authority to impose a penalty as fines. By adding this provision, the work burden over the tribunal handling such matters shall get reduced up to a maximum extent.

Benefits of these changes to Industries and Workers: 

The new code on Industrial relations elaborates that the central or state governments have the authority to appoint conciliation officers in order to mediate and promote settlement of various industrial disputes running between employer and workers.  The appointed officers can investigate the dispute and hold conciliation proceedings so that both parties may be agreed and arrive at a fair and amicable settlement of the matter of dispute.  In case, if there is no settlement possible, then any party can make an application to the Industrial Tribunal or National Tribunal related to the nature of the dispute. 

Change no. 8 – Provisions of Voluntary Arbitration for Settlement of Industrial Disputes:

This new Code allows for amicable settlement of industrial disputes raised between the employer and the workers through voluntary arbitration.  Both parties (i.e. the employer and the workers) are required to sign a written agreement of voluntary arbitration in case of dispute arise and in such conditions, such disputes are referred to arbitrator(s).  The arbitrator(s) shall investigate the dispute and submit the arbitration award to the appropriate government.

Change no. 9 – Concept of Standing Order into New Industrial Relation Code: 

All industrial establishments with at least 100 or more workers shall have to prepare a standing order on matters listed in First Schedule of this new Code.  Instead Appropriate Government, now the central government will be preparing model standing orders on matters listed in First Schedule of this new Code, based on which all industrial establishments are required to prepare their own standing orders.  These matters are related to the classification of workers, the manners of apprising workers about hours of work, holidays, paydays, and wage rates in the language understood by majority of workers, Manners of termination of employment, Suspension for misconduct, grievance redressal mechanisms for workers, Mechanism of redress for workers against their discriminating treatment or any unlawful exactions by his company,  manager, agent, servant or employer, And any such matter which may be indicated by the appropriate Government by gazette notification.

Change no. 10 – Concept of Notice of Change: 

Company or Employers who recommend necessary changes in the  Service conditions of their workers including their wages, contribution amount, and leave related matters etc. are obliged to inform workers through serving notice as listed in the Third Schedule of the Code.  

Other Changes: 

 

  • The members of the Grievance Redressal Committee has been increased from 06 to 10
  • The definitions of Worker, Industry, Strike, Appropriate Government, Lay-off, Lock-out, Tribunal, Unfair Labour Practice, Unorganised Sector, wages, fixed-term employment etc. have been specified keeping in view the present labour reform framework

 

Conclusion

The central government has tried her best to simplify this code so that friction between employer and trade union can be minimised and the labour of organised as well as an unorganised sector can be benefitted with the new provisions introduced. 

At present, there is an acute need of amalgamating all older labour laws as these laws are hardly implemented and its adverse effect is being realized in our trifling performance in Ease of Doing Business Index. By simplifying labour codes, the government is trying to bring in maximum governance with minimum laws which is being welcomed by both employers and labour bodies.   

Mahatma Gandhi Ji once said that employers are the trustees of workers’ interests and they must safeguard their welfare, wellbeing and right of work. 

Keeping in view, the above-mentioned statement of the father of our nation and also keeping in view in today’s competitive business trend, it is important that employer too needs supports so that he may run his business without unforeseen difficulties and safeguard “the Dignity of Labour” in his business context.


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join: https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post Key Changes Introduced by the Code on Industrial Relations Bill 2019 appeared first on iPleaders.

5 Industries where Sexual Harassment Laws Implementation is Particularly Challenging

$
0
0

This article is written by Yavanika ShahTeam LawSikho.

One of the big myths about sexual harassment policies implementation in workplaces is that it is a robotic implementation of the provisions of the Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013. 

In reality, it is much more than that. 

Sexual harassment has severe reputational implications for any organization. In some industries, commercial damage follows reputational damage very quickly. 

Hence, the mode of implementation of the provisions of the POSH Act has to be customized for such industry sectors. 

These industries also have varied and bigger budgets for implementation. 

We list down a few of the industries where the POSH consultant needs to implement certain customizations so that they can cater to the industry in a better way. 

We have used the example of employee sensitizations, but other functions also correspondingly need customization. 

This is precisely where trained POSH consultants step in to add value.     

#1 Educational Institutions (Schools & Colleges) 

In 2016, the University Grants Commission came up with its regulations in relation to the prevention of sexual harassment at the workplace specifically addressing the universities (see here).

This regulation describes the responsibilities of higher educational institutions in taking measures for the prevention of sexual harassment. 

This is a different framework as compared to the 2013 Act. For example, complaints committees in universities require student representation. Sexual harassment is gender-neutral under the regulations, as compared to the POSH Act, 2013 where it is woman-centric. 

A few other customizations that are desirable when working in an educational institute can be:

  1. Sensitize the employees and particularly, the students at large on the zero intolerance towards this issue.
  2. A guideline for “Ethics for research supervision” should be drafted, along with the usual POSH documents as students of research and doctoral studies are more vulnerable to sexual harassment.
  3. Ensure that students are aware of the redressal system, and the authorized persons to contact and report such issues.
  4. Since an education setting deals with a huge number of employees and students at once, setting up complaint boxes placed in accessible locations is one way to accelerate prompt complaints from everyone.

#2 Hotels 

Hotels are particularly vulnerable to sexual harassment at the workplace since it is a more customer-centric workplace where the basic demand of the job is to be customer friendly at all times.

The training part against the sexual harassment laws is, therefore, the most complex part of implementing POSH at the hotels, since it shall cater the most to how any sexual harassment is taken care of. The following aspects are not only to be part of training, but must be included in sexual harassment policies themselves: 

  • The POSH training at hotels should ensure that the employees are thoroughly trained about the design layout of the hotel. Any kind of panic button in the hotel should be brought to their notice and a proper roadmap regarding contacting security in cases where any guest harasses.

  • The female employees specifically, who cater to guests should be trained regarding the techniques they can use in cases of any misbehavior. Further, assistance to the women employees in reporting these cases should be the prime concern of the hotel management.

  • The usual focus of hospitality is to make guests happy and give them what they want, but if a guest is harassing or threatening, safety must take priority. Remind employees that, if they feel unsafe, they should leave the room, even if they haven’t completed their work. And let them know not to return to the room before security addresses the situation.

  • Train your employees to stand up straight, and make eye contact with a guest who is speaking to them or walking toward them. If a guest uses sexually explicit language or tries to touch them, they need to know they can firmly tell him to stop.

#3 Hospitals

Hierarchies in healthcare put employees at high risk for workplace sexual harassment. Recently, in September, a hospital was fined 25 lakhs rupees for not having an ICC in place. Let us see how can hospitals customize their POSH implementations:

  • Clear, solid policies and even more importantly, procedures and communication for reporting any problems around the hospital, including potential harassment.

  • The procedures for reporting need to be such that staff knows things will be managed in confidence and there will be no retribution.

  • A pertinent aspect of POSH implementation in hospitals is the situation of dealing with patients as the harassers. Most sexual harassment policies focus on employees and their interpersonal interactions, but the healthcare environment adds the element of patient and caregiver interactions that are also applicable to sexual harassment laws. Patients and their caregivers may be the harassers or victims of harassment.

  • The complex personal interactions of a hospital setting should be kept in mind while drafting the policy as in some cases, patients who have traumatic brain injuries, dementia, may lack appropriate self-control or awareness that results in inappropriate behavior towards healthcare staff, for which, in the end, the employer is responsible.

  • Very often, caregivers and doctors have unusual power and influence over patients. Aso, medical personnel often need to disrobe patients or deal with their sexual organs for medical purposes. For instance, examination of a rape victim and two finger test has caused massive controversies in the past. The disbalanced power dynamics, as well as specially sensitive situations, must be dealt with in the policy and training. 

#4 Malls

A recent survey showed that while media attention has largely focused on the prevalence of sexual harassment in politics and media, its pervasiveness across all industries, but particularly in ones with a high number of service-sector workers is astoundingly high. 

Malls and Shopping centers, again, being a service-centric industry are more prone to sexual harassment from the customer-dealings they come across. 

https://lawsikho.com/course/diploma-advanced-contract-drafting-negotiation-dispute-resolution

Click Above

Adding to this is the uncertainty that may surround a sexual harassment incident for employees in a shopping complex space. The sexual harassment in these spaces sometimes becomes so frequent that the employees might normalize it by being desensitized to the situation. 

It is prudent to train the employees, especially the women employees about ways to tackle any hints of sexual harassment that they might come across and report it as soon as they can to the authorities. 

#5 Media & Entertainment Industry (Shoots, Newspapers, Journalists, etc.)

Media and Entertainment Industry is the most talked-about industry every time we talk about sexual harassment at workplace complaints. It is mostly because of the temporary nature of the employees that work here. 

Media and entertainment is a very relationship-driven industry. The rewards in terms of money, visibility, and influence are controlled by a few gatekeepers, and as a result, the abuse of power and vulnerability of people working here is more prone to sexual harassment.

Further, the people that work in the industry usually work on a contractual basis. The ‘extras’ are hired on a day to day basis. This makes the accountability of the acts of the people in power a lot more invisible. This further incentivizes non-reporting of sexual harassment cases in this sector, particularly.

A way forward is drafting a Code of Conduct that can be signed by all the stakeholders. It can be made a part of contractual documentation of any person who is hired in any project even temporarily. It could specify timely steps to address allegations of harassment, discrimination, and violence in the workplace.

These are a few industries where customization in terms of implementation of the POSH law is the need of the hour.

We have primarily discussed customization of employee sensitization training and policy above, but other responsibilities of an expert also change in a significant way. 

Examples of customization include:

  • Situation-specific training for ICC members (on hearing, decision-making, conducting inquiries, etc.), 
  • Creation of operating manuals and SOPs for ICCs, 
  • Management onboarding sessions for CXOs, 
  • Consultation calls and helplines for doubt-clearing with respect to ongoing cases, 
  • Upgradation of processes and policies, 
  • Review and design of communication to the team members  

Since sexual harassment is highly sensitive in these industries, such organizations can be convinced to have larger budgets for implementation, if experts are able to demonstrate additional value. 

What other industries do you think that requires expert guidance on implementation of POSH?

Let us know by commenting below or call us at 01133138901. Let us discuss how you can build a thriving practice around POSH implementation.

We have launched an upgraded course on sexual harassment law at the workplace which includes 12 instructor-led classrooms, weekly exercises on simulations and feedback on the same. 

You will practice conducting mock hearings, summoning witnesses, collection and appreciation of evidence, documentation of proceedings and writing down various kinds of decisions and recommendations in these exercises. 

Those who want to find out more about this program can visit the link here.

Here are some other courses you could enroll in for learning practical aspects of law practice:

DIPLOMA

Diploma in Advanced Contract Drafting, Negotiation and Dispute Resolution

Diploma in Cyber Law, Fintech Regulations and Technology Contracts

Diploma in M&A, Institutional Finance and Investment Laws (PE and VC transactions)

Diploma in Intellectual Property, Media and Entertainment Laws

EXECUTIVE CERTIFICATE COURSES

Certificate Course in Capital Markets, Securities Laws, Insider Trading and SEBI Litigation

Certificate Course in Prevention of Sexual Harassment at the Workplace

Certificate Course in Labour, Employment and Industrial Laws for HR Managers

Certificate Course in Advanced Criminal Litigation & Trial Advocacy

Certificate Course in Real Estate Laws

Certificate Course in Media and Entertainment Law: Contracts, Licensing and Regulations

Certificate Course in Legal Practice Development and Management


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post 5 Industries where Sexual Harassment Laws Implementation is Particularly Challenging appeared first on iPleaders.


Overview and Applicability of Software Licensing Agreement in India

$
0
0

This article is written by Mehar Verma, a 3rd-year law student from Jindal Global Law School. In this article, the author talks about the meaning and applicability of the software license agreement.

Introduction

Software license agreements are entered into when an owner or a developer of software wants to provide his product to the market without selling it. The agreement lays down the terms and conditions of the usage of the software and protects the rights of both the owner and the user.

The agreement protects the copyrighted software from fraudulent activities and ensures that the time and money of the developers is not wasted. If A Ltd. wants to lease its software to B, they would enter into a software licensing agreement, which would allow B to use the software for his benefit, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the agreement.

What is a software licensing agreement?

A software licensing agreement is a legal contract between the owner of the software and its purchaser. The main objective of the software licensing agreement is to protect the interest of the company selling the software as well as the purchaser. The agreement acts as a full package to the purchaser, containing details like from where, how and the number of times it can be installed, the price of the software, restrictions on the use of the software. Additionally, the agreement also mentions the purchaser’s ability to copy, modify, or redistribute it.

For example, Company A ltd is a tech company dealing with voice modulation software and B a budding musician is interested in purchasing their software. Now upon payment of the required fees, A ltd and B enter into a licensing agreement and according to their agreement, B is granted a limited, nonexclusive and nontransferable licence, to use the voice modulation software. The agreement licence may also impose certain restrictions on B, such as B may not be allowed to permit other individuals to use the software, or he may not be allowed to modify it, copy it or reproduce it.

Why do you need a software licensing agreement?

As a software developer, you must have spent a lot of time, money and effort in the building of your software. To ensure that all the efforts are worthwhile and to bring monetary gains, your software must be protected. The agreement protects the copyrighted software from various frauds and infringements. Below are the five main reasons why every software developer should enter into a software licensing agreement before selling your software.

https://lawsikho.com/course/diploma-advanced-contract-drafting-negotiation-dispute-resolution

Click Here

Prevents abuse of the software

If there is no licensing agreement between the seller and the purchaser, the seller can easily sell the software or duplicated without the permission of the owner. This makes your product easily available in the market, and you as a developer do not get the profits or the recognition. Lack of a licensing agreement leaves you nowhere as no remedy can be sought for misappropriation of your product. Thus a licensing agreement prevents the abuse of the business and the software.

Allows licensing of the software

To make your product available in the market, you can license it through the agreement and not necessarily sell it. Licensing of the software is better as it allows you to retain all rights and impose restrictions on the usage of the software. Further, it gives you the liberty to license the software to more than one customer and make money in the long run.

For example, A Ltd company’s voice modulation software is unique and is high on demand. If A sells his product to one customer, he loses all his rights and would not be able to make an income from his invention. However, instead of selling, if they license their software, they will not only be able to impose restrictions but can they can license it to more customers, thus making more money.

Allows to disclaim warranties

Every customer would have different expectations from the software you are providing and sometimes these expectations are beyond imagination. To prevent such situations the company can include a disclaimer of warranties clause.

For instance, B a customer of A Ltd purchased their voice modulation software and due to some software bugs, he lost his data. Subsequently, he filed a suit against A ltd, claiming remedies for the damages occurred. Now A Ltd. could argue that as per their agreement there was no guarantee that the software will be not bug-free and as B agreed to accept the software as it is, there is no liability on A ltd.

Limits your liability

Not limiting the liabilities, makes a company subject to several lawsuits. These lawsuits damage the reputation of the company, consumes time and at the same time require financial assistance. Thus it is important to have a licensing agreement that limits your liability and prevents the customers from initiating lawsuits. However, the liability clause should be reasonable and fair to both parties.

Allows termination of usage

A license agreement of software, allows the owners to terminate or suspend the licensing agreement at any point in time, if the terms of the agreement are not complied with, thus retaining the complete control over the software at all the times. For instance, while purchasing the software, from A Ltd, B had signed an agreement that he would install the software only on the approved devices or his contract would be terminated. B breached the contract, giving A Ltd. the liberty to terminate the contract.

Types of software licenses in India

The software licenses in India can be broadly classified as proprietary licences, free software licenses, and open source licenses.

Proprietary software licence

The proprietary software is computer software that is licensed by the owner of the copyright under very specific terms. In general, it is the most restrictive type of licensing agreement wherein the original code was written by the programmers are not available to the users.

Thus they can use the software but they cannot modify it or redistribute it. This software is also known as the closed source software and the operating system of windows and Mac is an example of proprietary software. To protect their intellectual property, the companies enter into proprietary software licences.

Free software license

Free software licenses have lesser restrictions than the proprietary software licences. The software can be freely used by the users to modify the software, or redistribute it, which would otherwise be prohibited by copyright law. Thus free software license is entered into by the owners of the software when they wish to provide the recipients the privilege of modifying or redistributing the copyrighted work.

Open-source software license

The open-source software license allows the user to make modifications to the software and make the source code available or transparent. As the license allows other developers to see the original code, it is usually developed as a public collaboration and made freely available.

The license does not restrict any party from selling or redistribution of the software as long as the distribution is made under the same terms as the license of the original software. The General Public License or GNU is an example of an open-source software license that was developed as a result of collaboration and research of open developer communities.

What should a software license agreement cover?

A software license agreement can be divided into four sections and each section covers an important aspect of the legal contract. The four sections can be broadly classified as follows:

  1. General information: The first section in the agreement lays down the type of agreement, when the contract comes into effect, duration of the agreement and other general information that is necessary to set the tone of the entire agreement.
  2. Parties involved: This section provides the details of the parties entering into the contract. The name and address of the company selling the software as well as the full name and address of the purchaser are provided in the agreement. Further, the agreement specifies whether the purchaser is a corporation or an individual.
  3. Terms of this agreement: This section is considered the most important part of an agreement as it lays down the terms and conditions of the agreement. It would include the fee of the license, information about maintenance, services and refund policies if any. It would also include whether the code of the software would be provided, or whether the user is allowed to install the software in more than one computer, etc.
  4. Final details: This section is personally modified and would contain all the details that were not covered previously. This section also contains the signature of both the parties and the date of signing.

What are the important clauses of the software license agreement in India?

The four sections mentioned above only provide an overview. But to protect oneself and to ensure that a well proof agreement is entered into, the legal contract must contain the following clauses.

Non-exclusivity

If the offeree entered into an exclusive agreement and there is no clause of non-exclusivity, then it imposes a hindrance for further licensing of the software.

For instance, A ltd licenses his voice modulation software to B and their agreement has a non-exclusivity clause. C and D are also interested in A Ltd’s software, as A Ltd entered into a non-exclusive contract they can further license their software to C and D as well and continue to make more profits.

Non-transferability

The non-transferability clause in an agreement does not give the licensee the right to transfer the software to a new client or customer. This makes sure that your customers are not reduced and further that you do not have an enforceable agreement with a third party.

For example, when A Ltd licensed its software to B, the agreement did not contain a non-transferability clause. Now, C, an interested party instead of leasing the software from A Ltd, got it from B. This would result in a loss to A Ltd which would increase exponentially with every transfer.

Rights 

By including a clause that protects your rights even after the execution of the agreement is important to protect the product. These rights include copyrights, intellectual property rights, and distribution rights. The rights would ensure that no component of your product is stolen by any user or the market.

Modification

In case you do not want any kind of modifications to be made to your software or product, your agreement should provide so. The clause should define the meaning of modifications and the restrictions imposed on such modifications. This is the best way to ensure that your software retains its original content.

Breach of contract

A breach of contract clause should be included in the agreement. This clause specifies that if any condition or terms of the agreement are not complied with, the licensee has the liberty to revoke the contract. For example, A Ltd while leasing its software had provided with a no modification clause and B modified the software according to his needs. In such a situation, A Ltd has the liberty to revoke the contract without attracting any liabilities.

Limitation of liability

This clause mentions that the licensee has accepted the software in its current position and that there is no warranty for the usage of the software. As discussed earlier, this clause provides a shield to the company leasing the software. Without this clause, the company would be open to unlimited lawsuits.

Governing law

This clause provides the law or court that would have jurisdiction in case any disputes arise.

For instance, A Ltd and B enter into a software license agreement. Later, they had a dispute and B filed a petition in one of the District Court of Delhi. A Ltd contended that the suit is not valid as the governing law clause of their agreement provides that all disputes arising out of the contract would be settled through arbitration in Mumbai. Thus, in this case, all disputes will be resolved through arbitration in Mumbai and no other Courts would have jurisdiction.

Conclusion

The software license agreement is a necessary tool to protect the rights of the owner as it prevents abuse of the software, allows licensing of the software, allows to disclaim warranties limits the liabilities of the owner, and allows termination of usage. 

As per the needs of the software license, they can be broadly classified as proprietary software licences, free software license, and open-source software license. Proprietary software licenses are commonly used while distributing operating systems like Mac and windows and have restrictive terms and conditions.

Free software license has lesser restrictions as compared to proprietary software license whereas open-source software license allows the software license to be developed as a public collaboration.

Some of the important clauses that every software license should include are non-exclusivity clause, non-transferability clause, rights clause, modification clause, breach of the contract clause, limitation of liability clause and governing law clause. 


To know more about IP licencing agreements, Please Click Here.


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post Overview and Applicability of Software Licensing Agreement in India appeared first on iPleaders.

Presumption of innocence and reverse burden of proof: maintaining rights of accused in current crime epidemic

$
0
0

This article is written by Tanisha Prashant, a student of Institute of law, Nirma university. 

Introduction 

In the current times, when India is witnessing a violent upsurge in crimes, and specifically brutal crimes like rape, the country has felt the need to establish a more deterrent approach towards justice delivery. But does justice comes at the cost of ignorance towards one’s fundamental human rights? 

The lawmakers have recently introduced provisions which put the accused on the pedestal where to get free he has to prove his innocence rather than the prosecution discharging the proof. However, there are certain principles in the criminal justice system that can never be overlooked. If neglected they will only lead to miscarriage of justice. Presumption of innocence is one such principle. 

This article examines statutory provisions of the burden of proof and its reversals in criminal offences, and analyses the justifications for such provisions in light of the importance of the presumption of innocence. Also pertinent is the emergence and strong need for introducing human rights in criminal trials. This article argues that international human rights principles are especially pertinent to the interpretation of reverse burdens, and naturally require stricter standards to be fulfilled before a reverse burden can be upheld. If India is to establish human rights based approach with respect to criminal justice, addressing the current arbitrariness of statutory reversal of the onus of proof would be a crucial step forward in that direction. 

What is Presumption of innocence?

Justice is never alien to rights. Justice rests on the anvil of equal rights and liabilities, therefore, in criminal trial rights of both the parties have to be balanced to meet the ends of justice. Being negligent or biased towards any ones right will lead to miscarriage of justice. A defendant/convict/accused has the right to be presumed innocent until proven guilty and this is a central tenet of our criminal justice system. Though not specifically enshrined in the criminal code of India, but there are provisions which work on this principle. Section 101 and 102 of the Indian evidence act, which assert that any person approaching the court to give its judgment on any legal right or liability must prove the existence of facts that he asserts. Thus, the burden of proving fact always lies upon the person who asserts it. But there are certain provisions and statutory regulations which undermine this principle and place the burden of proving his/her innocence on the accused rather than on the prosecution. The common law maxim, “ei incumbit probatio qui dicit, non qui negat “(the burden of proof is on the one who declares, not on one who denies) was confirmed by the Supreme Court, Burden of proof lies on the party asserting it and never on the party denying it. 

The presumption of innocence is the principle which asserts that an individual is always considered “innocent until proven guilty”. This was first and foremost laid by jurist Blackstone, when he said that it is better to let 10 guilty escape than let a single one innocent suffer. The House of Lords in the landmark case of Woolmington vs Dpp held that presumption of innocence is the golden thread of criminal law and can in no way be jeopardized. The same was vehemently followed by the Indian Supreme Court and is a well established principle of the Indian jurisprudence. The presumption of innocence does not have the same effect as other presumptions in criminal law. While other presumptions generally deal with the alleviation of proof, the presumption of innocence does not. There is no burden per se that is lifted from the defendant. Thus the presumption of innocence does not have the effect of shifting the burden of proof to the prosecution. Rather, the burden begins with the prosecution. Accordingly, the presumption of innocence is akin to maintenance of status quo of the defendant

In the case of Noor Aga Khan vs. state of Punjab it was held by the apex court that, though not explicitly mentioned in the constitution, presumption of innocence is nevertheless a potent background to the conception of justice, in preserving confidence in enduring integrity and security of a legal system.

https://lawsikho.com/course/insolvency-bankruptcy-code-ibc-nclt-sarfaesi
                Click Above

Need and importance of presumption of innocence

In the current times we witness that convictions are escaping the very fundamentals of human rights principles by convicting persons on mere suspicion rather than proof. The criminal justice system of any country is the reflection of how the society functions. The state through its criminal justice system has far reaching effects as it shows the liberal and democratic approach of the country while dealing with the vulnerable. In the world’s largest democracy such powers cannot be unbridled and have to be used cautiously. Presumption of innocence thus not only acts as a right but as a principle as to how the state should exercise its coercive powers. Trapping innocent individual in the rigors of criminal law is against the very principle of democracy and justice. Further the factor of resources has also been looked upon by the court, all the parties may not have equal resources and cannot prove himself or herself to be innocent while in the process. Conviction for a criminal offence generally involves the imposition of some form of punishment upon the defendant. Such sanctions inevitably encroach on fundamental rights, for example, the right to personal property (fines), the right to liberty (imprisonment), and the right to respect for private life (community sentence, imprisonment). In addition, a convicted individual is exposed to potentially severe mental atrocities which come due to the reactions of the public and physical tortures resulting from the inhumane conditions of the prison cells. 

If the State is to curtail an individual’s fundamental rights, it follows that any conviction must result from a fair trial. It supports other rights such as the right to silence and is a concomitant of the right to liberty. The presumption of innocence also plays a crucial role in balancing the superior power and means of the State against those of ordinary citizens. Trials are fact finding scenarios and not a place for errors or mishaps. Most importantly, the presumption of innocence safeguards the right of an individual not to be wrongfully convicted. The accused is being made to rebut a presumption of guilt and prove his innocence. A balance of probabilities standard does not in any way justify a reverse onus clause because the burden on the accused is ultimate implying that his failure to discharge this burden would result in his conviction. Such a procedure comes up as a highly oppressive and harsh procedure on the accused. Burden of proof in criminal law plays a major law, in the trial procedure. It helps in running a free and fair trial by keeping both the parties at the same level. Where burden of proof is on the wrong party, it will vitiate the judgement of the court and eventually lead to miscarriage of justice.

It is pertinent to note that the rules relating to burden and standard of proof in criminal trials are indispensable because they promote individual freedom and are bulwark against oppression. Reversing the burden of proof renders accused a presumptive criminal disregarding his individual liberty and dignity and thereby violating Article 21 which give right to an individual to live with dignity. Wrongful convictions strip an individual of its dignity and respect in the society.

Right to a fair trial is an umbrella of rights under which the key right being, right to presumption of innocence. Presumption of innocence provides the basis for a defendant to remain silent and enjoy the privilege against self incrimination with the right to silence is a procedural protection designed to preserve citizens for exercise of coercive state power. It is a cardinal principle of criminal jurisprudence as administered in this country that it is for the prosecution and prosecution alone to prove all the ingredients of the offence with which the accused has been charged. The accused is not bound to open his lips or to enter upon his defence unless and until the prosecution has discharged the burden which lies upon it and satisfactorily proved the guilt of the accused. 

It is furthermore put forth that fair trial would mean a trial in which bias or prejudice for or against the accused is being eliminated. Erroneous convictions defeat public interest; guilty may just be unfortunate enough to meet the high demands of standard of proof. If the courts are to already presume that the person under trial is a culprit the court will proceed on biases rather than evidences.

International obligation and standpoints 

India is expanding itself on the international front today. In such a case, the need to follow and not just follow include in its practices the fundamental principles of human rights becomes the need of the hour. We cannot stand strongly by just improving our economic standards we have to stand all the stronger while delivering human rights to our citizens.

The moral doctrine of human rights aims at identifying the fundamental prerequisites for each human being leading a minimally good life. Human rights aim to identify both the necessary negative and positive prerequisites for leading a minimally good life, such as rights against torture and rights to health care. This aspiration has been enshrined in various declarations and legal conventions issued during the past fifty years, initiated by the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948) and perpetuated by, most importantly, the European Convention on Human Rights (1954) and the International Covenant of Civil and Political Rights (1966). Together these three documents form the centrepiece of a moral doctrine that many consider to be capable of providing the contemporary geo-political order with what amounts to an international bill of rights. Human rightsmeans rights relating to life, liberty, equality and dignity of the individual granted by the constitution or embodied in international covenants as enforced by courts. The courts have thus given the widest possible ambit while interpreting the concept of human rights.

Presumption of innocence is a human right and cannot be thrown away in any case. Article 6 (Right to recognition before law), Article 7 (Equality before law), Article 10 (Right to a fair trial), Article 11(2) (Right to presumption of innocence) under the universal declaration of human rights, create even more grave concerns for the accused in the present case. As they are rights which are fundamental to human life not just on a national level but in an international framework. Furthermore Article 9 (Right against arbitrary trial and detention) and Article 14 (Presumption of innocence for the accused and right to a fair trial) are the concerned rights under the ICCPR. It has been established earlier that conventions which are in consonance with the constitution can be deemed to be incorporated by the state. Henceforth, that courts while adhering themselves to domestic law may also look at the international framework, to minimize the violation of rights at its best.

Conclusion 

The effect of law has to be always looked by its effect by considering whether a law is good or bad. Presumption of innocence has today been watered down on the pretext of public interest and speedy justice. India in the wake of achieving the goal of deterrence, are making its courts constantly overlooking the rights of the accused. Special efforts are needed to make the criminal justice system more effective and by curbing the crimes of the nation, but that has to be done by keeping in mind the principles of justice and proportionality in mind. State action can never be arbitrary and has to be always in the interest of justice only. The court needs to take stronger steps in achieving and reiterating the principle of presumption of innocence as a fundamental human right and include it more prominently under Article 21.


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post Presumption of innocence and reverse burden of proof: maintaining rights of accused in current crime epidemic appeared first on iPleaders.

Rules & Procedures governing Mergers under the UK Law

$
0
0

This article has been written by Saurab Verma of 2nd year pursuing BA LLB course from Dr Ram Manohar Lohiya National Law University, Lucknow. This article will critically analyse the procedure and the rules governing the situations of the Mergers in the United Kingdom. Also, in this article, the main emphasis will be on the working of the Competition and Market Authority which is responsible during the merger situation.

Introduction

Mergers in the UK are governed by the Enterprise Act 2002 (amended by way of the Enterprise and Regulatory Reform Act, 2013). Mergers in which first-class for assessment will be issued to an investigation by way of the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA). They are the problem to evaluate if their annual UK turnover of the commercial enterprise agency which is being taken over exceeds £70 million, or the place the merger creates a 25% share in a market for objects and services in the UK or a large section of it.

Under the Enterprise Act, there is no statutory requirement to notify the applicable authorities when a merger takes place. Voluntary notification can, however, be given and is considered preferable. 

The CMA is accountable for the investigation of mergers which qualifies for reviewThe investigation is deemed essential in some instances due to the fact if the two or more groups merging into the equal entity serves to reduce opposition in the marketplace, the best of products or services may additionally diminish, the rate may additionally be stored excessive and technical development can also gradual down. If this has been to be the case, the hazard is a big lessening of competition. 

Though there will be a voluntary notification by the merger, the CMA will open an investigation on its personal initiative following, for instance, market intelligence or the place where there has been a complaint. Pending the planned exit of the UK from the European Union and any transitional preparations which might also be put in place, the UK is additionally problem to the EU Merger Regulation (EUMR), which applies the place the turnovers of the groups concerned in a transaction exceed positive thresholds, generally to the exclusion of the UK’s home merger control regime (and those of all other EU Member States).

If the EUMR thresholds are met then a notification to the European Commission (the Commission) is mandatory, and the UK merger rules will now not normally apply. Conversely, if the EUMR thresholds are not met, the EU guidelines will no longer typically apply. However, the initial jurisdictional analysis, it ought to be mentioned that there are provisions underneath the EUMR which enable cross-border mergers to be transferred between the Commission and the countrywide authorities to make sure that they are reviewed in the most terrific forum.

Overview of UK Merger Control

Mergers in the UK are ruled with the aid of the Competition and Market Authority(CMA) installed under Section 25 of the Enterprise and Regulatory Reforms Act, 2014. The CMA was once formed by combining and superseding the powers of Office of Fair Trading which was once made under Enterprise Act, 2002 and Competition Commission in the United Kingdom. CMA is a non-ministerial government department governed by an impartial board that involves both executives and non-executives. 

It also contains a panel of independent contributors who are selected on their ride level in areas of business, economics, regulation or opposition policy. CMA is a regulating authority accountable for each Phase1 examination of mergers and Phase 2 investigation and closing determination. Also, the CMA selections can be appealed to the Competition Commission which was installed under Section 12 of the Enterprise Act, 2002. The CMA normally makes meantime orders stopping any potentially prejudicial action, such as integrating the merging business. This may also encompass initial enforcement orders on businesses to monitor, forestall or reverse preemptive motion during a merger investigation.

It will typically do so when it opens an investigation into a done merger. Such an order stays in place till the transaction is cleared or the required remedial motion is implemented. A completed merger can be required by the CMA to be unwound if the regulator has life-like grounds to consider the events are integrating their businesses. This is Phase 1 of the investigation by means of the CMA, and it has to be commenced interior 40 days of either notification of the merger, or when the CMA receives ample records about the merger to begin its investigation. In Phase 2, the CMA can order that the carried out transaction is terminated.

This may, for instance, be via disposal of the received companies or assets – in all likelihood at decrease than market value or otherwise unfavourable terms. The CMA can also order that the customer acquires no similarly shares in the goal enterprise without the CMA’s consent. And if an executed merger is referred to the CMA, the merged entity must attain the CMA’s consent earlier than similarly integrating the businesses. It can even prohibit the completion of the merger. Where it deems quintessential the CMA can receive undertakings from the parties to take the vital action to prevent or unwind pre-emptive action.

https://lawsikho.com/course/diploma-companies-act-corporate-governance

Click Here

Part 3 of the Enterprise Act 2002

Part 3 of the Enterprise Act, 2002 states about the rules and procedures followed by the Office of Fair Trading(OFT), related to the duties to make references in the case of anticipated mergers as well as for completed mergers. This part basically describes the principle stages for the procedure followed in both Phase 1 and Phase 2 investigations. 

Brief description of the system of merger control in the UK

UK merger control is governed by way of the Enterprise Act 2002, as amended with the aid of the Enterprise and Regulatory Reform Act 2013 (ERRA). There is an authority called Competition and Market Authority(CMA) which was established under ERRA13 as the UK’s economy-wide opposition authority accountable for making sure that competition and markets work properly for consumers. 

On 1 April 2014, the purpose of the Competition Commission (CC) and many of the basis of the Office of Fair Trading (OFT), which includes the CC’s and OFT’s merger manipulate functions, have been transferred to the CMA and these our bodies abolished. The CMA’s most important duty is to promote competition, both inside and outside the UK, for the advantage of consumers.

Guidelines, rules of procedure and other relevant publications

This instruction forms the phase of the recommendation and data published with the aid of the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) below Section 106 of the Enterprise Act 2002, as amended (the Act). It is aimed to supply widespread data and advice to agencies and their advisers on the methods used with the aid of the CMA in running the merger control authority is specified in the Act.

It also includes the coaching on when the CMA will have jurisdiction to overview mergers underneath the Act. These documents are in particular concerned with those mergers involving corporations energetic in the United Kingdom (UK) that are governed by the provisions of the Act. However, it also temporarily addresses these mergers that fall to the European Commission (the Commission) beneath the European Union Merger Regulation (the EU Merger Regulation), and the relationship between domestic and European merger manipulate systems. It explains the roles of the CMA, the Secretary of State, and relevant sectoral regulators.

CMA publications

These are the following publications by the CMA-

  1. Mergers – the CMA’s jurisdiction and procedure: CMA2
  2. Merger assessment guidelines: CC2/OFT1254
  3. The quick guide to UK merger assessment: CMA18
  4. Water and sewerage mergers: CMA49
  5. Disclosure of information in CMA work: CC7
  6. Merger remedies
  7. Variation and termination of undertakings and orders: CMA11
  8. Mergers exceptions to the duty to refer and undertakings in lieu
  9. Mergers customer survey design and presentation
  10. Retail mergers commentary: CMA62
  11. CMA’s mergers intelligence function: CMA56
  12. Review of NHS mergers: CMA29
  13. Economic analysis submissions best practice: CC2com3
  14. Government in markets: OFT1113

Adoption by the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) of OFT/Competition Commission publications

The ERRA13 made the CMA as the UK’s economy-wide competition authority responsible for making sure that competition and markets work properly for consumers. On 1 April 2014, the features of the Competition Commission (CC) and many of the features of the Office of Fair Trading (OFT), which include the CC’s and OFT’s merger manage functions, were transferred to the CMA and these bodies were abolished. The CMA’s predominant duty is to promote the competition, each inside and outdoors the UK, for the gain of consumers. 

Under the Act, the CMA has a feature to achieve and review facts relating to merger situations, and an obligation to refer for an in-depth ‘Phase 2’ investigation any applicable merger scenario the place it believes that it is or can also be the case that the merger has resulted or may additionally be expected to result in a good-sized lessening of opposition in a UK market. Following a reference for a Phase 2 investigation, the CMA conducts a more distinctive evaluation to decide whether: 

(i) there is an applicable merger situation falling inside the UK merger manipulate regime, 

(ii) that applicable merger situation has resulted or may be predicted to result, in a huge lessening of competition, and

(iii) it takes action to treatment any giant lessening of competition identified. At Phase 2, those selections are taken by an Inquiry Group of at least three people, chosen for every case from the unbiased professionals appointed with the aid of the Secretary of State to the CMA’s panel.

Delegated legislation adopted by the Secretary of State

The Secretary of State has a role in certain public hobby cases. The Secretary of State is in a position to modify certain provisions of the Act through secondary legislation, for example, these provisions referring to jurisdictional thresholds, and to make secondary regulation related to things such as the stage of merger fees. 

The SOS has the strength to take over the position of decision-maker from the CMA in relation to mergers which have a doable have an effect on the UK public activity (“public activity mergers”). The sectors to which these powers apply are constrained by using legislation, and presently cowl countrywide security, the media quarter (including newspapers, tv, and radio), and the need to maintain the steadiness of the UK monetary system. The SOS has the power to prolong these classes (for example, the financial stability criterion was once delivered throughout the world monetary disaster of autumn 2008).

The CMA’s Duty to Make References: Phase 1 Investigations

Duty to make references: completed mergers

The OFT shall make a reference to the Commission if the OFT believes that it is or may additionally be the case that an applicable merger scenario has been created; and the introduction of that state of affairs has resulted, or may be anticipated to result, in a giant lessening of competition within any market or markets in the United Kingdom for goods or services. 

The OFT might also decide no longer to make a reference under this part if it believes that the market involved is not, or the markets worried are now not of adequate significance to justify the making of a reference to the Commission; or any relevant customer advantages in relation to the introduction of the applicable merger situation concerned outweigh the full-size lessening of competition involved and any destructive outcomes of the widespread lessening of opposition involved as integrated beneath Section 22 of the Enterprise Act, 2002.

Discretion not to refer

If the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) believes that it may additionally be the case that a relevant merger situation may additionally lead to a widespread lessening of opposition (SLC), then it is below accountability to refer the merger for in-depth (phase 2) investigation. However, in positive instances, the CMA has a discretion now not to make a reference however the fact that there is a sensible prospect that the merger will lead to an SLC in a market or markets in the United Kingdom. 

These are when the markets worried are no longer of  full-size to justify a reference in the case of predicted mergers, when the preparations concerned are insufficiently some distance advanced, or insufficiently perchance to proceed, to justify a reference; or when any applicable consumer advantages bobbing up from the merger outweigh the SLC worried and any unfavourable penalties of the SLC concerned. 

Markets of insufficient importance

Under Sections 22(2)(a) and 33(2)(a) of the Act the CMA may also parent out now not to refer a merger for an in-depth ‘phase 2’ investigation if it believes that the market(s) to which the duty to refer applies is/are no longer of ample significance to justify a reference. This exception is designed to keep away from references being made where the expenses concerned would be disproportionate to the significance of the market(s) concerned.

The CMA considers that the market(s) concerned will typically be of ample value to justify a reference (such that the exception will now not be applied) where the annual price in the UK, in aggregate, of the market(s) worried, is extra than £15 million. By contrast, the place the annual charge in the UK of the market(s) worried is, in aggregate, plenty much less than £5 million, the CMA will often now not assume about a reference justified until a straight forward task in lieu of reference is in principle available.

Where the annual price in the UK, in aggregate, of the market(s) concerned is between £5 million and £15 million, the CMA will reflect on consideration on whether or not or no longer the expected consumer injury ensuing from the merger is materially large than the frequent public fee of a section 2 reference.

The CMA will base its evaluation of envisioned patron damage on the dimension of the market concerned; its view of the probability that an SLC will occur; its evaluation of the magnitude of any competition that would be lost; and its expectation of the duration of that SLC. 

The CMA will additionally take account of the wider implications of its selections in this area, and will be less in all likelihood to exercise its discretion, and consequently more maybe to refer, the area the merger is one of a possibly large quantity of comparable mergers that ought to be replicated across the region in question.

Customer benefits

While mergers can damage competition, they can also give an upward push to efficiencies which enhance rivalry and/or produce applicable purchaser benefits. If the efficiencies springing up from the merger enhance contention inside a market where an SLC finding would possibly probably arise, the CMA can take this into account in its evaluation of the merger’s have an effect on competition. 

For example, a merger of two of the smaller corporations in a market resulting in effectivity positive aspects might permit the merged entity to compete more efficiently with the larger firms. Rivalry-enhancing efficiencies may lead the CMA to conclude (at Phase 1) that the merger does not provide upward shove to a realistic prospect of an SLC in a specific market, or may additionally mitigate the severity of any SLC prompted by means of the merger.

Relevant patron benefits are defined with the aid of Section 30(1) of the Enterprise Act 2002 (the Act) to be advantages to relevant customers in the shape of lower prices, higher satisfactory or increased choice of items or offerings in any market in the United Kingdom, or higher innovation in relation to such items or services.

Sections 30(2) and (3) of the Act grant that advantage is only an applicable patron benefit if it has accrued or is anticipated to accrue to relevant customers inside the UK within a lifelike period from the merger and would be unlikely to accrue without the merger or a similar lessening of competition.

Relevant clients are clients at any factor in the chain of manufacturing and distribution and are consequently no longer constrained to final customers section 30(4) of the Act. It is not possible for the CMA each 

(i) to observe relevant purchaser benefits as an exception to the obligation to refer, eg in relation to certain affected markets, and 

(ii) to accept a venture in lieu in recognize different affected markets.

The CMA is exercising its discretion in identifying whether to apply an exception to the responsibility to refer the merger in question for a Phase 2 investigation. In exercising this discretion, the CMA has regard to the benefits of a Phase 2 investigation, along with the possibility of redress being got at Phase 2 that should stop an SLC while additionally taking pictures any relevant patron benefits.

Circumstances in which a reference cannot be made

Section 22(3) of the Enterprise Act, 2002 states that no references shall be made if the making of the reference is avoided with the aid of area 74(1) or 96(3) or paragraph four of Schedule 7 or if the OFT is thinking about whether to accept undertakings beneath section 73 rather of making such a reference or the applicable merger scenario worried is being, or has been, dealt with in connection with a reference made under section 33 or a notice under section 42(2) is in pressure in relation to rely or the be counted to which such a word relates has been finally decided under Chapter 2 otherwise than in circumstances in which a word is then given to the OFT under section 56(1) or the European Commission is considering a request made, in relation to the remember concerned, by the United Kingdom (whether by myself or with others) under article 22(1) of the EC Merger Regulation, is proceeding with the count in pursuance of such a request or has dealt with the be counted in pursuance of such a request.

Duty to make references: anticipated mergers

The OFT shall make a reference to the Commission if the OFT believes that it is or can also be the case that arrangements are in growth or in contemplation which, if carried into effect, will result in the creation of a relevant merger scenario and the introduction of that situation can also be predicted to result in a good-sized lessening of opposition within any market or markets in the United Kingdom for items or provider as integrated beneath Section 33(1) of The Enterprise Act, 2002.

Relevant merger situations

A merger needs to meet all three of the following criteria to constitute a relevant merger state of affairs for the functions of the Act:

  1. Two or extra businesses should give up to be distinct, or there should be preparations in growth or in contemplation which, if carried into effect, will lead to businesses ceasing to be distinct.
  2. Either the price of UK turnover of the business enterprise which is being acquired exceeds £70 million or the organizations which end to be wonderful grant or accumulate items or services of any description and after the merger collectively grant or collect at least 25 per cent of all those unique items or offerings furnished in the UK or in a considerable section of it. The merger has to result in an increment to the share of furnish or consumption. In practice, therefore, the share of furnish checks can only be met the place the agencies concerned supply or gather goods or services of a similar kind (known as ‘the share of providing test’).
  3. Either the merger (subject to certain exceptions) the merger has to have taken vicinity not greater than 4 months earlier than the reference is made.

Enterprises ceasing to be distinct 

Two enterprises will ‘cease to be distinct’ if they are brought under common ownership or control.

Enterprises

The time length ‘enterprise’ is defined in part 129 as the activities, or part of the activities, of a business. The commercial enterprise business enterprise in query wants not, therefore, to be a separate felony entity. The definition states that the things to do in the query need to be carried out for ‘gain or reward’. 

However, there is no requirement that the transferred things to do ought to be profitable or generate a dividend for shareholders, and the definition can also consist of transfer things to do performed on a not-for-profit basis. In making a judgment as to whether or not or now not the matters to do of a commercial enterprise or part of a business, symbolize an employer under the Act, the authorities will have regard to the substance of the association beneath consideration, as a replacement than essentially its crook form. 

A corporation can additionally encompass any huge variety of components, most generally together with the property and records wished to raise on the business, at the same time with the benefit of existing contracts and/or goodwill. In some cases, the switch of physical assets on my very own can also be ample to represent an enterprise, for occasion where the facilities or website on-line transferred allow a unique commercial enterprise activity to be continued.

Intangible property such as intellectual property rights is unlikely, on their own, to represent a business enterprise except it is plausible to pick out turnover at once related to the transferred intangible assets that will additionally switch to the buyer. 

The business acquired may additionally no longer be trading then again this does now no longer in itself forestall the company from being a corporation for the functions of the Act. 

Control

‘Control’ is not restricted to the acquisition of outright voting control however consists of conditions falling quick of outright control. Section 26 distinguishes three tiers of hobby referred to as control. Section 26(3) presents the Authorities with a discretion to treat cloth have an effect on and de facto control as equal to criminal control. The Act additionally consists of provisions to deal with situations in which an organization acquires manage through levels or the place ‘associated persons’ may act collectively to achieve control.

The turnover test

The ‘turnover test’ is relaxed the place the annual price of the UK turnover of the company being received exceeds £70 million. In most situations, the turnover test is utilized to the turnover of the received company that used to be generated through the sale of goods or offerings to clients within the UK in the commercial enterprise 12 months preceding the date of completion of the merger or, if the merger has not yet taken place, the date of the reference to the CC.

The share of supply test

Under section 23, the ‘share of providing test’ is blissful if the merger enterprises, firstly, provide or accumulate goods or offerings of a specific description; and will after the merger at the same time supply or acquire 25 per cent or more of these items or services, in the UK as an entire or in a tremendous part of it, furnished that the merger outcomes in an increment to that share. amplify in the share of furnish must result from the corporations ceasing to be distinct. In the case of an acquisition, the share of the furnish is based absolutely on the activities of the acquirer and the goal company.

In joint venture situations, the share of the furnish is calculated through reference to the things to do of the joint venture, even though it will consist of shares of the joint task parents the place they proceed to undertake the equal things to do as the joint venture. The Act expressly allows the Authorities a broad discretion in describing the applicable goods or services, requiring entirely that, in relation to that description, the parties’ share of furnish or acquisition is 25 per cent or more. 

The share of furnish is one of a type from a market share, and objects and offerings to which the share of imparting take a seem at is utilized favour now not quantity to the market described for the financial analysis. In addition, the authorities may also additionally have regard to any practical description of a set of goods or services to decide whether or not or now not the share of providing check is met—the value, cost, price, quantity, capacity, range of people employed or any other criterion might also additionally be used to determine whether or no longer the 25 per cent threshold is reached. 

Time limits and prior notice to meet the standards for an applicable merger situation, the merger must either now not yet have taken place or have taken vicinity not more than 4 months before the reference is made. However, in instances the place the OFT has not been knowledgeable without delay of cloth data about the merger, the four-month period is deemed to have commenced when fabric facts are ‘made public’, ie when they are ‘so publicized as to be usually known or without difficulty ascertainable’. 

The OFT also has the strength to ‘stop the clock’ in positive circumstances, for instance, the place it is waiting for requested statistics from the merging parties. Section 27(5) and 27(6) permit the Authorities to deal with successive occasions inside a duration of two years involving the equal parties (or in the outcome of the same arrangements or transaction) as happening simultaneously on the date of the present-day event. The Authorities have discretion on whether or not to apply this section.

CMA procedure in Phase 1

Notify Mergers to the CMA

In the United Kingdom, Merger notification is voluntary. Meaning thereby, it depends on the businesses to whether or not to notify to CMA of a merger or not, even if the merger is being qualified to be reviewed below CMA. However, there is no prohibition on the corporations finishing transactions besides clearance from the CMA, which may on the other hand supply upward jab to some risks. So if the companies choose to notify the CMA, they can do it by using filling the shape ‘ Merger Case Team Allocation Request Form’ via which CMA will choose the gorgeous case team and start the process of discussing with the merger events about what facts is required before formal notification is made.

 After this, the groups merging will notify the CMA using the ‘ Notice Merger Template’ in which the details and instruction on the statistics necessary to allow the CMA to check an expected or done merger are provided.

CMA’s market intelligence function

The fact that it is the discretion of the businesses to whether or not to notify CMA or now does not imply that CMA will no longer evaluate it. The UK merger regime contemplates the opportunity of merger assessment initiated through the CMA itself where it believes it may also have jurisdiction. Under Section 5 of the Act, the CMA is responsible for obtaining, compiling and preserving under evaluate information about things related to the carrying out of its functions under the Act.

In order to raise out these functions, the CMA proactively evaluations a range of information sources, together with countrywide and consultant change press, to achieve statistics about predicted and achieved mergers. The CMA also continues an active speak with Governmental departments and different regulatory bodies to gain Genius about merger activity. Also, there are alternative ways in which by ask the CMA to think about the merger.

Informal advice

In planning mergers and acquisitions, it is for events and their advisers to affirm whether or not transactions might grant upward push to opposition concerns. However, in order to aid the planning and consideration through organizations and their advisers of future mergers, the MU is prepared to furnish advice on a casual foundation on opposition problems IA is reachable fully for transactions that are neither hypothetical (‘too quickly for IA’) nor in the public domain (‘too late for IA’). 

In assessing whether or not a non-public transaction is suitable for the IA process, the CMA will normally anticipate being cosy that there is a great have faith intention to proceed as evidenced through capacity of a possible viable to do so, having regard to 

(i) adequate financing; and

(ii) heads of settlement or similar for agreed transactions; or two 

(iii) proof of board-level consideration through the acquirer the place occasions required IA prior to notifying the target. 

These factors are non-exhaustive and the CMA will be open to persuasion that a precise appropriate trust idea is fantastic for IA consideration, for instance when a changing customer is honestly considering making a bid in the context of a public sale situation. – The CMA believes it can materially help business, and justify the use of its personal sources for IA, solely when its duty to refer is a real issue.

It sees no cost to the commercial enterprise or the taxpayer in accepting invitations to recommend the propositions of advisers that a transaction raises no such issue. Parties, with the exception of seasoned Bono cases, are well-placed to be counted on proper exterior advice in such cases; as the UK regime is voluntary, they are of the route beneath no duty to notify their transaction to the CMA. 

Pre-notification discussions

Pre-notification discussions take location when the events to a merger have decided to notify the CMA and wish to interact with it, generally on the contents of a draft notification, prior to formal submission. The use of the prenotification phase to discuss a supposed notification with the case team on a confidential groundwork is an essential section of the entire merger evaluation process. 

For agencies planning to notify a merger, the CMA consequently strongly encourages events to contact it to engage in prenotification discussions at least two weeks before the supposed date for notification.

Pre-notification contacts advantage the parties, and often the CMA, with the aid of serving, for example, to two instruct the case team where markets are complex and/or unfamiliar or two frames the transaction, along with its intent and efficiencies, in a practical context early on and clarify the statistics and evidence the CMA will:

a) required for the functions of the Merger Notice in the case at hand, so as to be able to formally start its investigation on the forty working day statutory timetable, and/or

b) will request early in the review procedure.

Notification using a merger notice

Once a merger is announced, and thereby turns into public knowledge, the companies involved may formally notify their merger to the CMA. Where the parties have not signed a share buy settlement or equivalent, the CMA will normally expect to be at ease that there is a suitable trust intention to proceed, as evidenced by, for example, ample financing, heads of agreements or similar, or proof of board-level consideration. 

In the case of a public bid, the CMA will count on at least a public announcement of an association intends to make an offer or the announcement of a possible offer in order to open a Phase 1 investigation.

As referred to above, events are inspired in all cases to have interaction in fantastic pre-notification discussions with the MU prior to making their remaining notification. Parties need to apprehend that must they pick (even if for probably comprehensible commercial reasons) to restrict pre-notification discussions, they will minimize the scope to agree with the CMA a more focused method to the statistics required in the case at hand for the purposes of a whole Merger Notice.

Where parties submit a notification, the MU will, on receiving it, think about whether it meets the requirements of the Act. Once the MU is blissful that it does, it will verify this to the parties. The forty working day period within which the CMA must determine whether the test for reference is met begins on the working day after that confirmation is given.

Own-initiative investigations

Even where the parties have no longer voluntary notified a merger by way of an entire Merger Notice, the CMA may also decide that the data it has bearing on to the parties and the merger and/or any facts it has obtained from the parties in response to its inquiry letter is sufficient for it to commence its investigation and start the forty working days statutory timetable for its Phase 1 investigation. 

Where the CMA sends an inquiry letter to the events on its very own initiative, the records it requests, probably by using way of extra information requests, will eventually be comparable to that which the parties would have furnished had they chosen to notify the transaction by means of way of Merger Notice.

For this reason, if the CMA receives from the parties in such conditions response to its inquiry letter containing ample records for the CMA to commence its investigation, the CMA will affirm this to the parties, and the forty working days statutory timetable commences on the working day after such affirmation is given.

Fast-track reference cases

For a case to be speedy tracked to reference, the CMA has to have evidence in its possession at an early stage in an investigation that it believes objectively justifies a trust that the take a look at for reference is met and the notifying events ought to have requested and given consent for use of the procedure. 

Candidate cases for speedy tune reference for a Phase 2 investigation are consequently probably to be instances where, to the extent that the CMA does find a concern with the merger, that problem would impact on the entire or substantially all of the transaction, and not simply one part. 

It is open to merger events to inform the CMA that they reflect on consideration on their case meets the standards for quick tune reference for a Phase 2 investigation during pre-notification, at the time of notification or at any factor all through the route of the CMA’s investigation. In addition to thinking about whether or not the case meets those criteria, the CMA will in identifying whether to utilize the quick tune manner have regard to its administrative assets and the efficient habits of the case.

Undertakings in lieu of a reference

If the CMA finds that its obligation to refer the merger for a Phase 2 investigation applies, the parties may have a possibility to keep away from that result via supplying binding undertakings in lieu of reference (UILs) for the CMA (or the Secretary of State in public pastime cases)to accept. UILs may additionally be established by the CMA only the place it has concluded that the merger must be referred for a Phase 2 investigation. 

Any UILs universal with the aid of the CMA should be for the reason of remedying, mitigating or preventing the enormous lessening of competition involved or any unfavourable outcomes identified. In order to take delivery of UILs beneath area 73 of the Act, the CMA must be assured that the opposition issues recognized will be resolved with the aid of ability of the UILs provided except the need for similarly investigation.

UILs are consequently fabulous solely where the opposition concerns raised by the merger and the remedies proposed to tackle them are clear cut, and these treatments are fine and capable of ready implementation. Experience has indicated that UILs are well-known most often in cases where, first, the troublesome overlaps symbolize a small percentage of the transaction and, second, these overlaps contain asset applications – such as stand-alone agencies in separate local markets – that are severable from the remainder of the transaction besides materially affecting the usual commercial purpose for the merger. 

These instances have nearly invariably led to ‘structural’ UILs to divest applicable property to an appropriate third-celebration purchaser authorized via the CMA. The CMA is tremendously unlikely to receive behavioural redress at phase 1. The CMA will therefore commonly anticipate UILs supplied by way of parties to be structural, as a substitute than behavioural, in nature.

Fees

All mergers that qualify for reference for a section 2 investigation are difficulty to a fee, irrespective of whether or not a reference for a section 2 investigation is made. The price is gathered by using the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) on behalf of HM Treasury. For mergers which contain the acquisition of a controlling interest, the fee becomes payable on the announcement of the CMA’s selection (or the Secretary of State’s selection in public pastime cases) whether or not or not to refer the merger for a segment 2 investigation.

The CMA’s exercise is to ship and the bill to the merger events after the decision on reference has been announced. Payment has to be made within 30 days of the date of the invoice. A merger charge is not payable if the merger involves the acquisition of a hobby that is less than a controlling hobby and the CMA investigated the acquisition on its own initiative. This exception does not follow if the merger parties notified such an acquisition by using submitting a merger notice.

Determination of Reference by the CMA: Phase 2 Investigations

Subject to complying with the Rules of manner for CMA Groups, and to any coaching issued through the CMA Board, Phase 2 Inquiry Groups are free to determine how they habit a Phase 2 inquiry. In exercise Phase 2 inquiries generally observe a fairly fashionable pattern, which is described in the following chapters, however, Inquiry Groups have the flexibility to range the way they function in order to lift out their felony duties successfully and inside the strict statutory deadlines. The responsibilities and powers of Inquiry Groups conducting  Phase 2 inquiry are set out in the Act.

The Phase 2 Inquiry Group and case team

All the CMA’s features in Phase 2 merger inquiries are carried out with the aid of way of Inquiry Groups. An Inquiry Group is appointed for each inquiry, supported through a case group of CMA staff. Under the ERRA13, the Chair of the CMA is responsible for figuring out and appointing the Inquiry Group that will habits a particular inquiry and for deciding on one of them to act as chair of the Inquiry Group (the Inquiry Group Chair). In practice, the Chair of the CMA will delegate these duties to the CMA Panel Chair. 

The CMA’s panel members come from a range of backgrounds, which include economics, law, accountancy and/or business; the membership of an Inquiry Group normally reflects a combination of know-how and ride (including industry experience).

For a Phase 2 inquiry, an Inquiry Group will comprise at least three (and usually no extra than five) members, including the Inquiry Group Chair. Before appointing members to an Inquiry Group, the CMA will fulfil itself of members’ availability and consider whether their outside hobbies could affect the impartiality, or appreciation of the independence of the Inquiry Group.

At operational (case team) level, in order to keep away from pointless duplication and facilitate an environment-friendly end-to-end merger review process, the CMA would normally anticipate to have a diploma of case crew continuity via maintaining at least some of the Phase 1 case group to work alongside newly assigned group of workers on the in-depth Phase 2 investigation when a rely is referred.

Investigations and reports

The Act imposes an obligation on the CMA to refer finished and expected mergers for an in-depth Phase 2 investigation if it believes that it is or may be the case that: two a relevant merger situation has been created or arrangements are in progress or in contemplation which, if carried into effect, will result in the advent of an applicable merger situation, and two the advent of that state of affairs has resulted, or can also be expected to result, in a huge lessening of competition inside any market or markets for goods or services in the UK.

The CMA may, however, determine no longer to make a reference for a Phase 2 investigation if it believes that: the market worried is not, or the markets worried are not, of ample importance to justify the making of a reference two any applicable patron benefits in relation to the advent of the applicable merger situation outweigh the tremendous lessening of competition worried and any detrimental outcomes of that good-sized lessening of competition, or two in the case of an anticipated merger, the preparations worried are now not sufficiently far advanced or are now not sufficiently possibly to proceed, to justify the making of a reference. 

Where the CMA finds that it is underneath a responsibility to refer a merger for a Phase 2 investigation, it can also underneath section 73 of the Act accept UILs to remedy, mitigate or stop the substantial lessening of opposition concerned or any unfavourable effect of it.

Under Section 22(3) of the Act, the CMA cannot refer a merger if two the Secretary of State has issued a public pastime intervention note regarding the merger and that note remains in force the Commission is thinking about a request for the merger to be referred to the Commission for review, or in the case of performed mergers, the applicable merger situation worried is being, or has been, dealt with in connection with a reference made of the anticipated merger.

Duty to treatment the anti-competitive results of mergers

Following a reference for a Phase 2 investigation, the Inquiry Group ought to decide,  whether or not an applicable merger situation has been or will be created, and two if so, whether or not the introduction of that state of affairs has resulted, or can also be expected to result, in a significant lessening of opposition within any market or markets in the UK for goods or services (where both limbs are satisfied, this is referred to as an ‘anti-competitive outcome’). 

If the Inquiry Group finds that there is an anti-competitive result it ought to decide,  whether or not motion be taken through it, or with the aid of others, to remedy, mitigate or prevent the sizeable lessening of competition involved or any damaging effect that has resulted from, or may additionally be anticipated to result from, that large lessening of competition, and two if action is to be taken, what motion ought to be taken and what is to be remedied, mitigated or prevented.

While most mergers that take location in the UK will not increase competition issues, the merger manage procedure is designed to permit the CMA to pick out these where such troubles may also arise so that they can also be excellent investigated and, where necessary, resolved thru excellent remedies.

 At Phase 1, the CMA’s test for reference (its ‘duty to refer’) will be met if the CMA has a practical belief, objectively justified by using applicable facts, that there is a sensible prospect that the merger will reduce opposition substantially. The statutory context of the Act means that in these Phase 1 instances the place there is proper uncertainty as to whether the obligation to refer arises, this question is one for resolution via the Inquiry Group on the foundation of a particular Phase 2 investigation. At Phase 2, the Inquiry Group is then required to base its selections on the stability of probabilities.

Duty to remedy the anticompetitive effects of mergers

Following a reference for a Phase 2 investigation, the Inquiry Group ought to decide: to whether or not an applicable merger situation has been or will be created, and two if so, whether or not the introduction of that state of affairs has resulted, or can also be expected to result, in a significant lessening of opposition within any market or markets in the UK for goods or services (where both limbs are satisfied, this is referred to as an ‘anti-competitive outcome’). 

If the Inquiry Group finds that there is an anti-competitive result it ought to decide: to whether or not motion be taken through it, or with the aid of others, to remedy, mitigate or prevent the sizeable lessening of competition involved or any damaging effect that has resulted from, or may additionally be anticipated to result from, that large lessening of competition, and two if action is to be taken, what motion ought to be taken and what is to be remedied, mitigated or prevented.  

While most mergers that take location in the UK will not increase competition issues, the merger manage procedure is designed to permit the CMA to pick out these where such troubles may also arise so that they can also be excellent investigated and, where necessary, resolved through excellent remedies. At Phase 1, the CMA’s test for reference (its ‘duty to refer’) will be met if the CMA has a practical belief, objectively justified by using applicable facts, that there is a sensible prospect that the merger will reduce opposition substantially. 

The statutory context of the Act means that in these Phase 1 instances the place there is proper uncertainty as to whether the obligation to refer arises, this question is one for resolution via the Inquiry Group on the foundation of a particular Phase 2 investigation. At Phase 2, the Inquiry Group is then required to base its selections on the stability of probabilities.

Time limits for the implementation of remedies

The CMA is difficulty to a statutory cut-off date of 12 weeks following its ultimate report, extendable once with the aid of up to six weeks if the CMA considers there are unique reasons for doing so, to implement its Phase 2 remedies. The CMA will draw up a timetable for the drafting and implementation of undertakings or order, and share key milestones with the major parties to help them plan their entry to the process.

CMA procedure in Phase 2.

The technique of agreeing on undertakings or making an order will involve informal consultation between the CMA (with meetings commonly being held at the case team level) and the essential parties. Third parties may additionally be consulted with the place relevant. Parties will be asked to comment on each substance of the draft undertakings or order, and on any clause which they consider to be exclusive and which they would choose to be excised from the posted model by way of reference to section 244 of the Act.

When a version of the undertakings has been provisionally agreed on which the CMA is willing to seek advice from publicly, the CMA will then post a notice of intention to receive ultimate undertakings’ or a ‘notice of intention to make an order’ to which the draft undertakings or order are annexed. A minimal session period (15 days for undertakings and 30 days for order) is allowed for involved parties to remark on the notice.

The CMA will discern out whether or not any changes want to be made to the draft undertakings or order in light of responses to the consultation. If any cloth modifications are required, a in a similar fashion minimal seven-day session period is required. Minor changes do no longer require in addition consultation. 

The CMA then publishes a notice of acceptance of undertakings’ or a ‘notice of making an order’. At this point, the inquiry is ultimately determined. Responsibility inner the CMA for any similar implementation of redress (for example, overseeing any divestiture process) will either pass over to the Remedies, Undertakings and Commitments Committee or to an Inquiry Group appointed to oversee this phase of the machine (possibly the actual Inquiry Group). 

Where treatment implementation is expected to be difficult or includes specific concerns it is in all possibility that either the unique Inquiry Group will be reappointed to oversee that process, or that a new Inquiry Group will be appointed rather than the matter being dealt with with the aid of way of the Remedies, Undertakings and Commitments Committee.

The ‘Substantial Lessening of Competition’ Test

A substantial lessening of competition

The term ‘substantial lessening of competition’ is no longer defined in the Act. Competition is seen via the authorities as a process of competition between firms in search of to win customers’ enterprise over time with the aid of supplying them a better deal. Rivalry creates incentives for companies to reduce price, make bigger output, enhance quality, beautify efficiency, or introduce new and better merchandise due to the fact it offers the chance for successful firms to take business away from competitors, and poses the danger that companies will lose business to others if they do not compete successfully.

A merger offers an upward jab to an SLC when it has a huge impact on competition over time, and therefore on the competitive pressure on companies to enhance their offer to customers or come to be more environment-friendly or innovative. A merger that offers an upward push to an SLC will be anticipated to lead to an unfavourable effect for customers. Evidence on probably damaging outcomes will consequently play a key role in assessing mergers.

Theories of harm

Theories of damage are drawn up by way of the Authorities to provide a framework for assessing the results of a merger and whether or not or not it should lead to an SLC. They describe possible changes springing up from the merger, and have an impact on contention and anticipated harm to clients as compared with the situation probably to occur barring the merger.

The Authorities may additionally revise the theories of damage as their assessment progresses. In formulating theories of harm, the authorities will reflect on consideration of how contention may be affected.

 They may set out those aspects of the merger firms’ competitive offers to customers over which corporations compete and which should worsen as an end result of the merger, whether in phrases of charge or non-price elements such as the volume sold, provider quality, product range, product first-class, and innovation. The ability of firms to adjust these aspects, and additionally the time inside which they can do so, will rely upon the market concerned.

The counterfactual

The application of the SLC test entails an assessment of the prospects for the opposition with the merger against the competitive state of affairs besides the merger. The latter is called the ‘counterfactual’. The counterfactual is an analytical device used in answering the query of whether or not the merger gives upward thrust to an SLC. 

While primarily based on evidence received by means of the Authorities in their investigations, it is typically now not comparable in element to their evaluation of the competitive consequences of the merger. A counterfactual can’t be built that includes violations of opposition law. Since the counterfactual may additionally be both greater or much less competitive than the prevailing prerequisites of competition, the choice of the terrific counterfactual might also extend or decrease the potentialities of an SLC finding by means of the applicable Authority

The approach to the counterfactual

In reviewing mergers at Phase 1, the OFT is required to assess whether or not the merger creates a sensible prospect of an SLC. The ‘is or may also be the case’ fashionable in the OFT’s SLC test additionally has implications for its approach to the counterfactual. The OFT considers the impact of the merger in contrast with the most competitive counterfactual offering constantly that it considers the situation to be a practical prospect. 

As a Phase 2 body, the CC takes an exclusive strategy considering that it has to make a general judgement on whether or no longer an SLC has befallen or is likely to occur. To assist make this judgment on the in all likelihood future scenario in the absence of the merger, the CC may have a look at countless possible scenarios, one of which may be the continuation of the pre-merger situation; however ultimately solely the most probable state of affairs will be selected as the counterfactual.

The exiting company scenario

The exiting company state of affairs is most normally considered when one of the corporations is said to be failing financially. It can also be especially vital in the context of an exiting firm situation for the Authorities to apprehend the rationale for the transaction below the review. 

For the OFT to be given an exiting company argument, it would need two to consider that it was inevitable that the company would exit the market and be confident that there used to be no considerably much less anti-competitive purchaser for the association or its assets. The OFT would then consider whether, having regard additionally into consideration, the result of the exit of the firm and its property would be a substantially much less anti-competitive consequence than the merger.

Market definition

The cause of market definition is to supply a framework for the authorities’ evaluation of the competitive results of the merger. The Authorities will pick out the market within which the merger can also give upward jab to an SLC (the relevant market). 

The applicable market includes the most sizeable competitive options on hand to the customers of the merger companies and includes the sources of opposition to the merger corporations that are the on the spot determinants of the effects of the merger (ie the Authorities’ intention when figuring out the relevant market is to encompass the most relevant constraints on the behaviour of the merger firms). 

The Authorities will ensure that the relevant market they identify satisfies the hypothetical monopolist test. Market definition is a useful tool, however not a quit in itself, and identifying the relevant market includes a thing of judgment.

The boundaries of the market do now not decide the result of the Authorities’ analysis of the competitive effects of the merger in any mechanistic way. In assessing whether a merger may supply upward thrust to an SLC the Authorities can also take into account constraints outside the applicable market, segmentation within the applicable market, or different ways in which some constraints are extra essential than others.

Measures of concentration

As part of their assessment of the results of a merger on competition, the Authorities may additionally use market shares and measures of concentration, assessed on the relevant market or some other market. Where such measures are regarded for the purpose of applying thresholds, the narrowest market described by using the hypothetical monopolist test must be employed. Concentration can be measured the use of such data as sales revenue, production volume, potential or reserves. 

The measure the Authorities will use will rely on the statistics of the case and the availability of information. For example, when products range in fantastic it might also be appropriate to use sales revenue as the basis. If exceptional suppliers make the same, or similar, products capability may be a substantial determinant of a firm’s aggressive energy and maybe a greater splendid foundation of assessment.

There are countless ways from which concentration can be measured, like for instance, market shares of firms in the market, each in absolute terms and relative to every other, can provide an indication of the plausible extent of a firm’s market power. The blended market shares of the merger firms, when compared with their respective pre-merger market shares, can supply an indication of the change in market electricity ensuing from a merger or ‘number of firms’. 

A straightforward rely of the companies in a market is a primary measure of concentration. The Authorities might also attach greater weight to the number of companies when considering coordinated effects. When assessing unilateral effects from local markets of mergers involving retailers, a matter of the wide variety of different fascias in a local location additionally conveys some records about concentration. 

Also, every other way is HHI. Herfindahl-Hirschman Index (HHI) is a measure of market awareness that takes account of the variations in the sizes of market participants, as well as their number. The HHI is calculated by using adding collectively the squared values of the proportion market shares of all corporations in the market.

The change Merger Assessment Guidelines, Part 5 Page 40 Competition Commission & Office of Fair Trading in the HHI (known as the ‘delta’) can be calculated with the aid of subtracting the market’s pre-merger HHI from its predicted post-merger HHI.64 The absolute stage of the HHI post-merger and the delta springing up from the merger can furnish an indication of the change in market shape ensuing from the merger.

Horizontal mergers

Unilateral effects can occur in a horizontal merger when one company merges with a competitor that until now furnished a competitive constraint, permitting the merged company profitably to raise expenditures on its own and barring wanting to coordinate with its rivals. Unilateral consequences can be horizontal or vertical.

Unilateral effects

Where products are undifferentiated, unilateral outcomes are extra probable where: the market is concentrated; there are few companies in the affected market post-merger; the merger outcomes in a company with a giant market share and there is no strong aggressive fringe of firms. Unilateral outcomes ensuing from the merger are extra probable where the merger eliminates a big aggressive pressure in the market. 

Where merchandise is differentiated, for instance via branding or quality, unilateral outcomes are more in all likelihood the place the merger firms’ products compete closely. To determine whether the merger effects in unilateral effects, the Authorities might also analyze the alternate in the pricing incentives of the merger firms created with the aid of bringing their differentiated merchandise underneath common ownership or control.

Coordinated effects

A merger can also supply upward shove to an SLC through coordinated effects. Coordinated results may additionally occur when corporations running in the equal market realize that they are together interdependent and that they can reach an extra worthwhile result if they coordinate to limit their rivalry. 

Coordination may additionally take distinctive forms. In many instances, it will contain firms retaining expenses higher than they would in any other case have been in an extra competitive market. However, coordination can in precept affect any component of the competition, for example by way of limiting manufacturing or innovation. 

Firms may also coordinate with the aid of dividing up the market between them, for example by geographic area or client characteristics, or by allocating contracts amongst themselves in bidding competitions. However, coordination want no longer involves all components over which firms compete. Coordination can be specific or tacit. Explicit coordination is performed through verbal exchange and agreement between the parties involved. Tacit coordination is carried out via implicit understanding between the parties, however barring any formal arrangement. Both can be germane to an evaluation of the results of a merger.

Non-Horizontal mergers

Non-horizontal mergers convey products collectively that do not themselves compete however may be related. They consist of vertical mergers (including diagonal mergers) and conglomerate mergers. Non-horizontal mergers do no longer involve a direct loss of opposition between corporations in the same market, and it is a well-established principle that most are benign and do no longer elevate competition concerns. Nevertheless, some can weaken competition and can also end result in an SLC. 

Examples of situations in which products are associated so that the authorities may additionally verify whether or not a merger gives rise to an SLC on the basis of non-horizontal outcomes include the place there is a vertical merger between an upstream provider and a downstream patron which purchases the supplier’s goods, either as an enter into its own manufacturing or for resale or diagonal merger between an upstream dealer and a downstream competitor of the clients that buy the supplier’s goods; and Merger Assessment Guidelines, Part 5 Page 50 Competition Commission & Office of Fair Trading or conglomerate merger of two suppliers of goods which do no longer lie inside the identical market, but which are nonetheless associated in some way; for example due to the fact they are enhances (so that a fall in the fee of one true increases the customer’s demand for another); or due to the fact, there are economies of scale in purchasing them (so that clients buy them together). 

Any given merger can have aspects of greater than one of the above. For example, a merger may additionally be characterized as phase vertical and part diagonal in phrases of its consequences on the competition. Non-horizontal mergers can lead to efficiencies, and this may result in the merged company having expanded incentives to compete to take business from rivals. This increased incentive to compete can end result in an amplify in the rivalry.

Efficiencies

While mergers can harm competition, they can also supply upward thrust to efficiencies. Efficiencies springing up from the merger may additionally enhance rivalry, with the result that the merger does not supply upward jab to an SLC. For example, a merger of two of the smaller corporations in a market ensuing in effectivity beneficial properties might permit the merged entity to compete extra successfully with the larger firms. The Act also allows efficiencies to be taken into account in the form of applicable consumer benefits. 

These advantages are described in Section 30(1), and are now not limited to efficiencies affecting rivalry. In addition, the statutory definition allows the Authorities to take into account benefits to clients bobbing up in markets other than where the SLC is found, and advantages to future customers. It is not unusual for merger firms to make effectiveness claims. 

To shape a view that the claimed efficiencies will decorate rivalry so that the merger does not end result in an SLC, the OFT must be satisfied, on the groundwork of compelling evidence, and the CC ought to expect, that the following criteria will be met: 

(a) the efficiencies need to be timely, probably and adequate to stop an SLC from arising (having regard to the effect on rivalry that would in any other case end result from the merger), and 

(b) the efficiencies need to be merger specific, ie a direct final result of the merger, judged relative to what would manifest barring it. Efficiency claims can be challenging for the Authorities to confirm due to the fact most of the data regarding efficiencies is held by the merger firms. The Authorities, therefore, encourage the merger corporations to grant evidence to assist any effectivity claims whether as part of the SLC analysis or the consideration of applicable patron benefits.

Barriers to entry and expansion

Any evaluation of a viable SLC consists of consideration of the responses of others (eg rivals, manageable opponents and customers) to the merger. In the longer time period opposition in the market may also be affected as new corporations enter, or the merged firm’s competitors take actions improving their capability to compete against the merged firm. 

Examples include, investment in new capacity, or conversion of current capacity to a new use, entry using new science enabling new manufacturing methods, investments in advertising and product diagram to reposition existing brands so that they compete more with these of the merged firm, sponsorship via clients of a new entrant with guarantees of business; and investment inability with the aid of customers to make their personal input so that they no longer need to purchase from the merged firm. 

All of these movements can mitigate the preliminary impact of the merger on competition, and in some instances can also suggest that there is no SLC. Potential (or actual) competitors may encounter barriers which adversely have an effect on the timeliness, likelihood and sufficiency of their capability to enter (or increase in) the market. 

Barriers to entry are therefore unique points of the market that provide incumbent firms advantages over achievable competitors. Where entry barriers are low, the merged company is greater probably to be constrained via entry; conversely, this is less probable where obstacles are high. The electricity of any given set of limitations to entry or growth will to some extent depend on conditions in the market, such as a growing degree of demand.

Countervailing buyer power

In some circumstances, a character client can also be in a position to use its negotiating strength to limit the ability of a merged association to raise prices. The Merger Assessment Guidelines, Part 5 Page 63 Authorities refer to this as countervailing client power. The existence of countervailing buyer strength will be an element in making an SLC finding less likely, where client electricity may make contributions to an SLC finding. 

If all clients of the merged firm possess countervailing buyer strength post-merger, then an SLC is unlikely to arise. However, often only some—not all—customers of the merged firm possess countervailing customer power. In such cases, the Authorities assess the extent to which the countervailing client electricity of these clients might also be relied upon to defend all customers. Buyer power can be generated by means of special factors. 

An individual customer’s negotiating position will be more suitable if it can without problems swap its demand away from the supplier, or where it can otherwise constrain the behaviour of the supplier. Typically the capability to switch away from a dealer will be improved if there are countless choice suppliers to which the purchaser can credibly switch, or the consumer has the capacity to sponsor new entry or enter the supplier’s market itself by means of vertical integration. 

Where customers have no choice but to take a supplier’s products, they may nevertheless be able to constrain costs through imposing expenses on the supplier. For example, customers may be able to refuse to purchase other products produced by using the supplier, or, in the case of a retailer, the role the supplier’s merchandise in less eye-catching parts of the store.

Even the place the market is characterized by way of clients who are larger than the suppliers, it does now not always comply with that there will be countervailing client power. The Authorities will determine whether or not and to what extent the merger is in all likelihood to decrease the customer’s potential and incentive to pursue credibly any of the strategies set out above.

It is possible, for example, that a merger might also decrease a customer’s ability to switch or even to sponsor new entry and, if this discount adversely impacts the negotiating role of a patron significantly, that customer’s client electricity will now not be enough to be countervailing.

Enforcement

As there is no requirement to notify mergers in the UK to the CMA, there is in a similar fashion no prohibition on companies finishing transactions barring clearance from the CMA. However, the CMA may, before it has reached its decision whether to make a reference, make an order underneath part seventy-two of the Act if splendid to forestall or unwind ‘pre-emptive action’ (a period in-between order). 

Pre-emptive motion is defined in the Act as which means any motion that would possibly prejudice the reference and/or obstruct the taking of any remedial motion that may additionally be required section 72(8) of the Act. In essence, period in-between orders are designed to end the merger events from beginning integration (or stop further integration) whilst the CMA’s investigation and possible remedy implementation is ongoing. 

As properly as searching for to prevent integration, the CMA may also, in extraordinary circumstances, require that existing integration is unwound. All such meantime orders (including consents thereunder) are posted on www.gov.uk/cma. Interim orders can also be imposed at any time all through the CMA’s review. The CMA’s use of meantime orders is distinctive in expected mergers and accomplished mergers due to the fact the danger of pre-emptive motion in an anticipated merger is usually a lot decrease than in a performed merger.

The CMA’s approach to making preliminary orders

Under section 72 of the Act, an IEO can be made as soon as the CMA has lifelike grounds for suspecting that it is, or may additionally be the case that two or more organizations have ceased to be distinct, or that preparations are in development or in contemplation which, if carried into effect, will result in two or greater corporations ceasing to be distinct. 

There are penalties for failing to comply with an IEO. Where the CMA considers that, except reasonable excuse, an IEO has no longer been complied with, it can also impose a penalty of a fixed quantity it considers appropriate, which shall no longer exceed 5% of the international turnover of the addressee of the IEO.

Remedies: Phase 2 Investigation

Phase 2 treatments are negotiated with, established by, and monitored by using the CMA. two If suitable undertakings can’t be agreed with the parties, the CMA will make an order to treatment the unfavourable findings. All such undertakings and orders are published. 

Broadly speaking, the sorts of remedies which the CMA might reflect on consideration on include the treatments structured to restore or keep all or phase of the pre-merger fame quo such as prohibiting all or phase of an expected merger or reversing a achieved one (in both case, this generally entails divesting one or extra of the merging parties’ organizations to a suitable purchaser, to get rid of the anti-competitive overlaps between the customer and goal and permit the remainder of the merger to proceed, or to unwind an executed anti-competitive merger), treatments intended to expand competition following the merger either from existing or new rivals (such as requiring the merged entity to give get admission to fundamental services or to license intellectual property); and remedies designed to exclude or limit the ability of the merged firm to take advantage of expanded market power bobbing up out of the merger (such as imposing a rate cap or different rate constraint, requiring improved transparency of expenses or obliging the merged enterprise to refrain from habits aimed at inhibiting entry) – these sorts of “behavioural” remedies are not favoured by way of the CMA and are used pretty rarely. 

The CMA has a length of 12 weeks following its Phase 2 selection within which to negotiate and finalize redress with the parties. This may additionally be extended with the aid of up to six weeks if there are “special reasons” for doing so (this is now not a specifically high threshold). The integral framework and goals of the redress will have been protected in the CMA’s final Phase 2 decision, so this later segment deals with the targeted negotiations and drafting of the undertakings which the parties will commit to in order to put in force the remedies. Third birthday celebration consultation will also take vicinity within the identical time frame.

‘Public Interest Cases’, ‘Other Special Cases’ and Mergers in the Water Industry

Public interest cases

The Act presents that (as the default position) the CMA decides whether or not to refer the merger for a Phase 2 investigation, and that the Phase 2 Inquiry Group makes the remaining choice as to whether or not any competition problems occur and whether or not any remedies are required, based basically on whether the merger has precipitated or may additionally reason a vast lessening of opposition (SLC).

However, the Act additionally approves for the Secretary of State to assume responsibility for figuring out whether or not or no longer to refer a merger when described public pastime considerations are probably applicable with the aid of issuing a public activity intervention word (PIIN).

 If the Secretary of State has referred a merger on such public pastime grounds, he or she also takes the remaining selection on whether the merger operates or may be expected to function against the public interest, and on any treatments for recognized public hobby concerns.

Section 42 of the Act, therefore, affords that the Secretary of State can also problem a PIIN in the case of mergers that meet the Act’s jurisdictional thresholds, that have public pastime implications and that the CMA has no longer referred for a Phase 2 investigation. Public hobby issues are presently limited to countrywide protection (including public security) plurality and other concerns relating to newspapers and different media and the balance of the UK financial system.

To facilitate this, the CMA has an obligation below section fifty-seven of the Act to inform the Secretary of State the place it is investigating a merger (at Phase 1) that it believes raises fabric public hobby considerations. However, even where a public pastime consideration is present, if such a PIIN is no longer issued, the CMA will treat the case and make its selection on competition grounds as if it had been any different merger case (and submissions on the public pastime concerns would therefore not be relevant in these circumstances).

Public Interest considerations

Section 58 of the Act details the public hobby concerns on which the Secretary of State can also intervene in a merger case. These are national security, including public security two the want for accurate presentation of news and free expression of opinion in newspapers the need for, to the extent that it is real looking and practicable, an adequate plurality of views in newspapers in every market for newspapers in the UK or a part of the UK the need, in relation to each and every one-of-a-kind target market in the UK or in a precise region or locality of the UK, for there to be an adequate plurality of persons with control of the media businesses serving that target market two the want for the availability at some point of the UK of a vast range of broadcasting which (taken as a whole) is both of excessive best and calculated to enchantment to a huge range of tastes and pastimes the want for persons carrying on media enterprises, and for these with control of such enterprises, to have a proper dedication to the attainment in relation to broadcasting of the objectives of the requirements set out in area 319 of the Communications Act 2003, and two the pastime of retaining the balance of the UK monetary system.

In addition to these distinctive concerns mentioned above, section 42(3) of the Act also allows the Secretary of State to intervene on the foundation of a consideration which is not designated but which the Secretary of State believes ought to be specified. To the extent that the Secretary of State intervenes on the groundwork of a consideration that he or she believes ought to be specified, he or she is required by section 42 of the Act to are seeking to have that consideration consequently inserted into Section 58 via skill of an order authorized with the aid of both Houses of Parliament.

Procedure in public interest cases: Phase 1

If a PIIN is issued, the case is dealt with in the following way: The CMA will put up an invitation to comment searching for 0.33 birthday celebration views on both competition and public activity issues. As properly as normally issuing an invitation for comment, the CMA will actively contact other governmental departments, sectoral regulators, industry associations and purchaser our bodies for their views on public activity problems the place appropriate. 

The CMA will lift out its review of the jurisdictional and competition troubles in the identical way as it would for any different case, with the caveat that its timetable will be adapted in order to allow it to supply its record to the Secretary of State by way of the closing date detailed in the PIIN. Following its very own interior review, the CMA then provides a recommendation to the Secretary of State on jurisdictional and competition issues, which have to be ordinary (section forty-six of the Act). The CMA is also required (other than in media public activity cases) to bypass to the Secretary of State a summary of any representations it has obtained that relate to these public pastime matters. 

The Act approves the CMA to furnish recommendation and recommendations on the public pastime consideration to the Secretary of State; however, given the CMA’s role as an opposition agency, it would not typically be predicted that the CMA would furnish its personal recommendation on public pastime problems at Phase 1.

The CMA will also inform the Secretary of State about the applicability of any of the exceptions to the obligation to refer and as to whether or not it would be excellent to deal with opposition worries by means of way of UILs. The content of such recommendation will without a doubt depend on whether the events have indicated to the CMA that they would be willing to provide UILs. 

The Secretary of State then makes a judgment on the outcome of the case in the mild of the CMA’s advice. Alternatively, the Secretary of State can also decide underneath Section 45(6) of the Act now not to make a reference on the groundwork that an anti-competitive effect in the shape of a CMA discovering of a practical prospect of an SLC is justified with the aid of one or greater public interest considerations. Where the Secretary of State is minded to refer, he or she will also reflect on consideration on whether or not UILs are justified.

If the Secretary of State concludes, after receipt of the CMA’s report, that there are no public activity troubles that are applicable to the PIIN, the CMA will be recommended below section 56 of the Act to deal with the merger as an everyday merger case. In any event, any choice in the case based totally on opposition concerns ought to follow from the CMA’s recommendation on whether or not it is or may also be the case that the merger has resulted or may additionally be anticipated to result in an SLC.

Procedure in public interest cases: Phase 2

If a reference is made on public pastime grounds (with or without competition grounds) the CMA conducts a Phase 2 inquiry and reviews to the Secretary of State. If the CMA considers that the merger operates or may additionally be predicted to function against the public interest, it makes guidelines as to the action the Secretary of State or others should take to remedy any unfavourable effects. 

The Secretary of State will make the final decision on the public interest test and take remedial steps it considers integral to tackle the opposition and public interest issues. The CMA’s Phase 2 procedures for public activity inquiries are similar to those for normal merger references.

The foremost variations are that the CMA affords its report to the Secretary of State and the ultimate choice on public hobby things lies with the Secretary of State. The CMA has to prepare a document and provide it to the Secretary of State inside 24 weeks (subject to a viable eight-week extension) from the date of the reference.

The Act does no longer require the CMA to consult the Secretary of State in the event that it proposes to extend the inquiry. When the Secretary of State has made a selection as to whether or not or now not to refer the case for a Phase 2 investigation, the Secretary of State is required beneath area 107 of the Act to post the CMA’s Phase 1 record (although the CMA will additionally want to make the file handy via www.gov.uk/cma).

The events will be contacted prior to guide to discuss whether or not the document incorporates personal data that ought to be excised prior to publication. The Secretary of State must additionally put up a non-confidential version of the CMA’s ultimate record in public activity instances no later than the book of his or her decision on the case (that is, within 30 days). The remaining decision on the fabric to be excised from the posted report is made via the Secretary of State. Shortly after the Secretary of State has published the CMA’s final report, it is additionally posted on www.gov.uk/cma.

‘Special public interest  cases’

Section 59 of the Act additionally permits the Secretary of State to intervene in a very limited wide variety of instances that no longer qualify beneath the Act’s standard merger regime but the place a particular consideration is applicable to the merger. These special merger situations might also occur in defence industry mergers if at least one of the agencies concerned is carried on in the UK by, or beneath the manipulate of, a physique company integrated in the UK and where one or more of the corporations worried is an applicable government contractor. 

In addition, following the Communications Act 2003, a one-of-a-kind merger scenario can also occur where the merger involves a dealer or suppliers of at least 25% of any description of newspapers or broadcasting in the UK. Unlike the trendy jurisdictional test, no increment to this share of supply is required. There will be no competition assessment in such cases.

In instances the place the Secretary of State has issued a different public activity intervention observe (SPIIN), the CMA will put together a report underneath Section 61 of the Act for the Secretary of State advising on whether a unique merger scenario has been created.

 The SPIIN will set out the time period inside which the CMA ought to furnish this file to the Secretary of State. The CMA will also summarise representations that it has obtained referring to to the considerations in the SPIIN. Given that the CMA is not expert in the considerations that would be predicted to be targeted in the SPIIN, it is likely to confine itself at Phase 1 to summarising and commenting on the representations received by means of applicable third birthday celebration experts, such as the Ministry of Defence.

Following a reference on specific public pastime grounds, the CMA would follow comparable strategies to these outlined for everyday mergers challenge to the procedural variations relating to public hobby mergers, even though its evaluation would be restrained to the public activity issues unique in the intervention notice. No merger price is payable in specific public interest cases.

European mergers

Under the EU Merger Regulation, the Commission has jurisdiction over ‘concentrations with an EU dimension’ (as described in Articles 1 and 3 of the EU Merger Regulation). National opposition authorities (NCAs) might also now not observe their personal competition legal guidelines to these mergers, without positive limited circumstances. The starting factor for the allocation of jurisdiction between the Commission and the CMA is that mergers that fall within the jurisdictional provisions of Article 1 of the EU Merger Regulation are no longer challenge to assessment under the Act.

This is because mergers reviewed by the Commission under the EU Merger Regulation benefit from the ‘one-stop-shop’ precept such that countrywide competition filings are now not required in the EU. However, as described further below, the EU Merger Regulation approves for the switch of instances between NCAs and the Commission in a number of ways.

Parties must also be aware that, even in instances where the Commission has and retains jurisdiction, the Commission continually consults the NCAs about mergers, and the EU Merger Regulation affords for NCAs to endorse the Commission in positive circumstances. The equipped UK authorities for the motive of the EU Merger Regulation are the Secretary of State and the CMA. The CMA has charge of the UK in a position of authority function in appreciate of the majority of mergers falling beneath the EU Merger Regulation.

This capacity that it is the CMA that liaises with the Commission on the assessment and dedication of cases over which the Commission has jurisdiction. 

Significantly, it additionally means that the CMA’s functions consist of finding out whether to request the referral of an EU Merger Regulation case from the Commission to the UK in total or in section below Article 9 of the EU Merger Regulation and whether to are seeking to refer a UK merger to the Commission in accordance with Article 22 of the EU Merger Regulation.

Alternatively, the CMA may additionally have to decide whether to consent to any request by means of the events for the referral of an EU Merger Regulation case from the Commission to the UK in total or in phase underneath Article 4(4) of the EU Merger Regulation or to a request that a case falling beneath the Act be transferred to the Commission in accordance with Article 4(5) of the EU Merger Regulation.

Mergers in the water industry

In some circumstances, mergers of water or sewerage undertakings in England and Wales are a concern to mandatory reference for a Phase 2 investigation. At the time of writing, beneath the Water Industry Act 1991 (as amended by area 70 of the Act) the CMA should refer any merger involving two or more ‘water enterprises unless the turnover of one or both of them falls under positive thresholds. two the CMA does no longer reflect on consideration on its Phase 1 IA manner to be suitable for advising on whether or not or now not a structure or transaction triggers the obligatory reference provisions.

However, by way of guidance, in reporting on the outcomes of any merger referred underneath the Water Industry Act 1991, the Phase 2 Inquiry Group should have regard to the variety of water corporations under independent control. This is to prevent prejudice to the capability to make comparisons between specific businesses in carrying out its regulatory functions.

In finding out on remedies, the Phase 2 Inquiry Group will be capable to have regard to their effect on client benefits, but solely were taking account of these benefits would not forestall an answer to the prejudice worried or where the advantages are predicted to be appreciably more necessary than the prejudice.

Conclusion

If the employer which you own or are concerned with has a UK, EU or global turnover which corresponds to the above amounts, you ought to be very aware of the law. You ought to especially be conscious that although notification in the UK is voluntary, it is risky (particularly if the merger potentially raises opposition issues) no longer to notify as the CMA ought to in some cases be extra likely to open an investigation into the merger.


To know more about Mergers & Acquisitions in India, Please Click Here.


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content. 

The post Rules & Procedures governing Mergers under the UK Law appeared first on iPleaders.

Injunction: All you need to know about it

$
0
0

This article is written by Aarchie Chaturvedi, a 1st-year student currently pursuing B.A.LL.B from NUSRL, Ranchi. This is an exhaustive article about injunctions describing its types and including the concepts of discretionary relief, disobedience, arbitration and damages in cases of injunction.

What is Injunction? 

Injunction litigation is a crazy ride consisting of low points, high points, twists, turns, and challenges. An injunction by its very name means a preventive relief. The grant of an injunction is an equitable remedy that prevents a defendant party from doing certain demonstrations or certain acts so that they are not bothersome or do not cause any nuisance to the plaintiff.

When a court comes with a judgment in such a suit, the parties must abide by and adhere to the ruling, in the absence of which there can be severe monetary penalties or even imprisonment in a few cases.

Explanation of important terms 

  • Prima facie– The word “prima facie” means either on first sight or on the first presence or on the face of it. Prima facie case means that recorded evidence should fairly enable the complainant’s search for the inference. 
  • Irreparable injury– “Irreparable harm” means any injury that cannot be fixed by damages adequately. The remedy in the form of damages would be insufficient if any is payable to the plaintiff in the case of victory in the litigation. It will not put him in the place where he was before the injunction was denied.
  • Balance of Convenience– The question of balance of convenience arises where there is uncertainty as to the satisfactorily of the respective remedies in damages available to either party or both. The parties must strike a proper balance and the balance can not be a one-sided affair.

Kinds of injunction

The Specific Relief Act, 1963 discusses the various types of injunctions. To prevent possible future injury to the plaintiff, the plaintiff would have to bear if the relief is refused, there are certain kinds of injunctions provided as mentioned below:

  • Temporary Injunction
  • Perpetual Injunction
  • Mandatory Injunction
https://lawsikho.com/course/diploma-entrepreneurship-administration-business-laws
              Click Above

What is Temporary injunction?

Under the Specific Relief Act, 1963, Section 37 deals with a temporary injunction. Temporary injunctions continue for a specified period of time or until the further order of the court. They may be allowed at any stage in a suit and are managed by the Code of Civil Procedure (1908). 

The essential purpose for granting this injunction is to secure the interests of an individual or the property of the suit until the final judgment is passed. The factors looked into while providing such an injunction are:

I. If a party has a case of prima facie?

II. If the balance of convenience is in favor of the complainant?

III. Whether the plaintiff would suffer irreparable damages before the judgment is passed?

The time period of such an injunction is dependent on the discretion of the court. This kind of injunction was also provided as under the case Union of India v. Bhuneshwar Prasad. 

Some examples of cases stated in the CPC where temporary injunction can be granted are:

  • Where any property in dispute in a suit, which is probable of getting wasted, destroyed or estranged by any party to the suit, or illegally sold in execution of a decree; or
  • Where the defendant threatens to remove or dispose of his property in order to defraud his creditors; or
  • Where the defendant threatens to deprive the plaintiff of his property or threatens to cause injury to the plaintiff in connection with the property in dispute in the suit; or
  • In any case to prevent the defendant from committing a breach of a contract or any other injury;
  • Where pursuant to sections 38 and 41 of the Specific Relief Act, no perpetual injunction or mandatory injunction could be granted;
  • Where to stay, the operation of an order for the transfer, suspension, reduction of rank, obligatory retirement, dismissal, removal or otherwise termination of service of any person appointed to public service and post in connection with State affairs, including any employee of any company or company-owned or controlled by the Government of the State;
  • Where to stay any disciplinary proceedings, pending or intended or having the effect of any adverse entry against any person appointed to the public service and to post in connection with the State’s affairs, including any employee of the company owned or controlled by the State’s government; or 
  • To restrict any election;
  • Where to restrain any auction intended to be made or restrain the effect of any Government auction; or stay the proceedings for the recovery of any dues recoverable as revenue on land unless adequate security is provided, and any injunction order granted in breach of these provisions shall be void.

In all cases, except where the object of granting the injunction appears to be defeated by the delay even before the injunction is granted, the Court shall issue a direct notice of the request for the same to be given to the other party:

Provided that, where it is proposed to grant an injunction without notice to the other party, the Court records the reasons for its view that the purpose of granting the injunction would be defeated by delay and requires the applicant to:

(a) deliver to or send to the other party by registered post, immediately after the order of granting the injunction, 

(i) a copy of the request for the injunction together with a copy of the affidavit filed in support of the request;

(ii) a copy of the complaint; and

(iii) a copy of the documents on which the applicant relies; 

(b) to file, on the day on which such injunction is granted or on the day immediately following that day, an affidavit stating that the copies aforesaid have been so delivered or sent. 

However, the court must dispose of such suits within a period of thirty days from the date of granting an injunction and in instances where it is not able to do so, it must specify the reasons for its inability.

Order for injunction may be discharged, varied or set aside– The CPC also states that, at the request of any party who is dissatisfied with the order, any order for injunction may be discharged or varied or set aside by the Court; subject to the knowledge that if a party made a false or misleading statement in a request for a temporary injunction or in any affidavit support, for such a request.

Furthermore, where an injunction has been issued after giving a party the opportunity to be heard, the order shall not be discharged, varied or set aside on the request of that party unless such discharge, variation or set-aside is necessitated by a change of circumstances or unless the Court is satisfied that the order has caused that party difficulty and hardship.

Injunction to a binding corporation on its officer– An injunction to a corporation is binding not only on the corporation itself but also on all members and officers of the corporation whose personal actions it seeks to curtail.

The interlocutory orders passed with regard to injunctions as stated in the CPC are as follows:

Power to order interim sale– Upon application by any party to a lawsuit, the Court may order the sale by any person named in that order, and on such terms as it considers fit, of any movable property that is the subject of such a lawsuit or that is attached before a judgment in such a lawsuit, which is subject to rapid and natural decline or which it may, for any other just and sufficient reason may be desirable to be sold off.

Detention, preservation, inspection, etc. of the subject-matter of the lawsuit:

(1) the Court may, at the request of any party to the proceedings and under such conditions as it considers fit:

(a) make an order for the detention, preservation or inspection of any property that is the subject of the proceedings or as to which any question may arise therein; 

(b) for all or any of the aforementioned purposes authorize any such person for any such purpose;

(c) authorize samples to be taken or any observations to be made or experiments to be tested for all or any of the aforementioned purposes which may seem necessary or useful for the purpose of obtaining full information or evidence.

(2) The provisions governing the execution of the proceedings shall, mutatis mutandis (making necessary alterations while not affecting the main point at issue), apply to a person authorized to enter under this rule.

Application for such orders to be made after notice: 

(1) The plaintiff may request an order under Rule 6 at any time after the suit has been instituted.

(2) An application by the defendant for a similar order may be made at any time after its appearance.

(3) Before making an order pursuant to Rule 6 or Rule 7 on an application for that purpose, the Court shall, except where it appears that the purpose of making such an order would be defeated by a delay, issue a direct notice to the other party.

When a party may be put in immediate possession of land which is the subject-matter of a suit: Where land paying revenue to Government, or a tenure liable to sale, is the subject-matter of a lawsuit, if the party in possession of such land or tenure fails to pay the Government revenue, or the rent due of the tenure to the proprietor, as the case may be, and such land or tenure is consequently ordered to be sold, any other party to the lawsuit claiming to have an interest in such land or tenure may, upon payment of the revenue or rent due previously to the sale (and with or without security at the discretion of the Court), be placed in immediate possession of the land or tenure; and the Court in its decree, may award to the defaulting party the amount so paid, with interest thereon at the rate that the Court considers fit, or may charge the amount so paid, with interest thereon at the rate ordered by the Court, in any adjustment of the accounts may be directed by the decree passed in the suit.

Deposit of money, etc. in Court: Where the object of a lawsuit is money or anything else capable of delivery and any party thereof admits that it holds such money or anything else as a trustee for another party or that it belongs to or is due to another party, the Court may order the same to be deposited in court or delivered to that last-named party, with or without security, subject to the provisions of the judgment.

What is Perpetual Injunction?

When perpetual injunction is granted by the judgment it ultimately disposes of the injunction suit. It is ordered at the time when final judgment is given. It is a final relief injunction and is not given on an interim basis. The granting of a perpetual injunction is defined under Section 37 (2) of the Specific Relief Act, 1963. The section says that only by the decree issued after an inquiry and on hearing the merits of the case can a perpetual injunction be granted; the defendant is thus perpetually enjoined to exercise his right or to forever pervade his conduct which would be in conflict with the rights of the plaintiff. According to Section 38 of the aforesaid Act, the perpetual injunction can be granted to the plaintiff when:

(1) In order to avoid a breach of duty in his favor, either specifically or by consequences, subject to the other requirements contained or as provided for in this Section; and 

(2) If such obligations occur out of the contract, the court shall be directed by the provisions and rules contained in Chapter II of the Specific Relief Act, 1963; and

(3) When the defendant invades or attempts to invade the plaintiff’s right to, or enjoyment of, property, the court may grant a perpetual injunction in the following cases, namely:

(a) where the defendant is the plaintiff’s property custodian; 

(b) where there is no standard for the determination of the actual damage caused, or where the invasion can reasonably be caused;

(c) where the invasion is such that adequate aid and help cannot be provided by compensation in money;

(d) where the injunction is required to avoid the ever-rising increase in the no.of multiplicity of judicial proceedings. Thus, there are different reasons for the existence of a perpetual injunction. 

The plaintiff must prove the breach of the obligation by showing the infringement of a legal right, thus the burden of proof lies with the plaintiff. The plaintiff must also lawfully possess the item and must prove that the defendant had no legal possession over the item. Injunction cannot be sustained on the basis of wrongful possession against the lawful owner. 

The continuance of possession by the lessee (a person who holds the lease of a property; a tenant) without the consent of the lessor (a person who leases or lets a property to another; a landlord) may not be “lawful possession” but it is “juridical possession” and the juridical possession is protected by law and injunction can be granted in such cases. 

Ownership and lawful possession are two different things, a person can be evicted by the process of law and such a person can resist any kind of invasion by the real owner and may be granted injunction. The contract for litigation fund is not per se illegal and the court can grant an injunction to protect the rights of the plaintiff arising out of the obligation. In the case of Nuthaki Venkataswami v. Katta Nagi Reddy, the court held that the champertous agreement in itself is not void and if the recovery is not against public policy, they can’t be called illegal and thus injunction may be granted.

In the case of Walter Louis Franklin v. George Singh, where the plaintiff filed a pleading before the court to grant perpetual injunction to restrain the defendant from unlawfully using his land where the defendant claimed that he was the real owner, the court, however, held that the perpetual injunction shall be granted as the land was in the possession of the plaintiff.

What is Mandatory Injunction?

Section 39 of the Special Relief Act, 1963 deals with the Mandatory Injunction. The section doesn’t clearly define mandatory injunction but deals with the grant of a mandatory injunction. The section says that in order to prevent the breach of an obligation the court can compel the performance of certain actions at its discretion which it is capable of enforcing and can issue injunctions for the infringement complained of. The principle of mandatory injunction is used to grant final relief and not the interim reliefs like in exceptional or exemplary cases like saving life, etc. There are essentially two conditions requested for mandatory injunctions:

(a) the defendant must be obliged to perform an act and any such breach of the obliged act must be claimed by the plaintiff;

(b) the reliefs, as asked for must be enforceable by the court. The principle says that the defendant must do a positive act in order to restore the wrongful act committed by him. 

In Dorab Cawasji Warden v. Coomi Sarab Warden, the Supreme Court held that: 

  1. The complainant must present a strong case in the court and it should be of a level higher than that of the prima facie case; 
  2. the plaintiff must make it clear that the grant of a mandatory injunction is obligatory to prevent irreparable damage or serious injury which cannot be compensated in terms of money; and,

(c) the balance of convenience should also be in favor of the complainant as against the defendant.

In the case of Laxmi Narain Banerjee v. Tara Prosanna Banarjee, where the plaintiff and the defendant were joint owners of the land and the defendant planted several trees that penetrated the foundation of the building and damaged it, the plaintiff then prayed for mandatory injunction to the court and the court accordingly granted it and held that the roots were damaging the building that belonged to the plaintiff. On the contrary note, in the case of N.E. Sankarasubbu Pillai v. Parvathi Ammal Others, the plaintiff whose right to land was encroached by the defendants, pleaded before the court to grant a mandatory injunction which was not granted as the essential conditions for the mandatory injunction was not fulfilled. However, in the case of C. Kunhammad v. C.H. Ahamad Haji, where the plaintiff demanded a mandatory injunction alleging that his land had been trespassed by the defendant by drawing a pipeline on his land and digging a trench up to 65 feet. The court in this case accordingly granted it as it held that the essentials were fulfilled and directed the defendant to remove the pipeline.

Difference between temporary and mandatory injunction

Temporary Injunction

Mandatory Injunction

1. Temporary injunctions continue for a specified period of time or until the further order of the court.

1. The principle of mandatory injunction is used to grant final relief and not the interim relief.

2. It is discussed under Section 37 of the Specific Relief Act, 1963.

2. It is discussed under Section 39 of the Specific Relief Act, 1963.

3. The essential purpose for granting this injunction is to secure the interests of an individual or the property of the suit until the final judgment is passed.

3. The essential purpose of granting a mandatory injunction is to control exceptional or exemplary cases like saving a life, etc.

4. The factors looked into while providing such an injunction are:

I. If a party has a case of prima facie?

II. If the balance of convenience is in favor of the complainant?

III. Whether the plaintiff would suffer irreparable damages before the judgment is passed?

4. There are essentially two conditions requested for mandatory injunctions.

(a) the defendant must be obliged to perform an act and any such breach of the obliged act must be claimed by the plaintiff.

(b) the reliefs, as asked for must be enforceable by the court. 

The principle says that the defendant must do a positive act in order to restore the wrongful act committed by him. 

5. This kind of injunction was also provided as under the case of Union of India v. Bhuneshwar Prasad, where a railway employee who had filed a suit against his removal from service stating that his suspension was illegal. He was granted an interim injunction restricting the defendant from removing him from service until the suit is decided and it was also observed that this did not mean that he would be put back to work. If a case is a proper one for specific performance and the plaintiff is likely to suffer irreparable injury unless the breach of contract is immediately restrained, the court will grant a temporary injunction to limit the breach of contract.

5. An example of this kind of an injunction can be the case of Laxmi Narain Banerjee v. Tara Prosanna Banarjee, where the plaintiff and the defendant who were joint owners of the land and the defendant planted several trees that penetrated the foundation of the building and damaged it, the plaintiff then prayed for mandatory injunction to the court and the court accordingly granted it and held that the roots were damaging the building that 

belonged to the plaintiff. Thus two conditions essential for mandatory injunction were fulfilled. Firstly, the defendant was obliged to see that the trees he planted did not penetrate and damage the foundation of the building but he failed to do so. And secondly, the damages asked for by the plaintiff were enforceable in the particular court and so the mandatory injunction was granted.

Concept of discretionary relief in relation to the grant of injunction 

Section 36 of the Specific Relief Act, 1963 discusses the circumstances where the court at its discretion can accept or refuse the enforcement of injunctions. To grant specific enforcement is the discretionary power of the court and it is on its discretion to choose a particular road of whether enforcing it or not. The court is not bound by specific performance just because something is lawful. However, the court is not allowed to act arbitrarily on its whims and fancies. The discretionary powers of the courts must be exercised on grounds of proper rationale and reason. Discretion should be exercised with respect to the principles of justice, equity, good conscience and fairness to both parties. 

Sub-section(2) under this enumerates situations in which a court can deny enforcement. Some of them being unfair contracts (giving unreasonable benefits to the plaintiff over the defendant) contingent contract, incomplete contracts, etc. Sub-section(4) under this section enumerates that the court shall not refuse to any party specific performance of a contract merely on the ground that the contract is not enforceable at the option of the other party.

It was also held that the plaintiff must come with clean hands while asking for enforcement of some injunction and the very nature of jurisdiction under this Act has been held to be just and equitable.

The Supreme Court has restated the factors which have to kept in mind while exercising the power of discretion by the courts which are:

  • Whether the complainant was ready and willing to perform his part under the terms of Section 16,
  • Whether it was a case of discretion by the court for decreeing specific performance under Section 16, & 
  • Whether there was an unreasonable delay on the part of the plaintiff in approaching the court.

This discretionary power of the court is also supported by Section 20(C) of the Specific Relief Act, 1963 which states that irrespective of anything or any provisions of law stated in the Civil Procedure Code,1908 a court can dismiss a suit within a period of 12 months from the date of service of summon to the defendant. The said period can also be exceeded to a period of six more months after reasons for such an extension is provided in writing by the court.

Disobedience of breach of an order of injunction

Although an injunction is a remedy in itself, in the event of a breach of this order, there needs to be another remedy to protect the complainant. The Latin term ‘Ubi jus ibi remedium’ which means where there is a right there is remedy is often used in explaining this concept as courts also need a remedy against the person who breaches their order to prevent further dishonoring of their orders.

The remedies available for a breach of injunction are as follows:

  • Order 39 Rule 2A of the Civil Procedure CodeThe CPC states that the court that granted the order or any other court to which the case was referred to may order the attachment of property of the individual, culpable of such disobedience, in view of the ‘disobedience of the breach of injunction’ or in view of the disobedience of the terms under which the injunction was granted. The court may also require the person to be detained in civil prison for a period of time not exceeding three months. However it must be noted that nothing attached under this order shall remain in force for a period of more than one year and if at the end of one year the breach continues to occur, the attached property may be rented out and the court will award compensation as it finds appropriate to the injured party and pay balance if any to the party entitled to it.
  • Order 21- Rule 32 of the Civil Procedure Code– It provides that a defendant who failed to comply with the decree will in the first place forfeit his right of ownership and the Court may later seize his property at its discretion.

Arbitration process under the granting of an injunction

‘Notwithstanding anything contained in Part I of the CPC, a judicial authority when seized of an action in a suit for which the parties have entered into an agreement, may refer to Section 44 of Arbitration Act, 1996, and shall refer the parties to arbitration at the request of any of the parties or of any person claiming by or under it, unless it finds that the agreement is void, inoperative or unable to be concluded by the parties.’

Damages in lieu of or in addition to the failure of performance of the injunction order

(1) In a claim for a perpetual injunction pursuant to Section 38 or for a mandatory injunction pursuant to Section 39, the plaintiff may claim damages in addition to or in substitution for such injunction, and the court may, if it considers it appropriate, award such damages.

(2) No compensation under this provision shall be granted unless the claimant requests such relief in the plaint. Provided: that where no such damages have been asserted in the plaint, the court shall, at any point of the trial, which may be just and fair for that argument, allow the plaintiff to amend the plaint.

(3) The dismissal of a claim to avoid the breach of a contract existing in favor of the plaintiff shall preclude his right to sue for damages for such infringement.

Conclusion

Injunction is an equity-based relief. It is completely at the court’s discretion to grant an injunction or to refuse it. The relief cannot be claimed as an affair of right however worthwhile the applicant’s case may be. The power to grant an injunction must, therefore, be exercised with the utmost prudence, vigilance, and care. It is an extraordinary and sensitive power that is associated with the risks of imposing losses or disadvantages upon the innocent party. Thus unlike all other things in this world, the grant of an injunction is also not absolute. 

One of the greatest hurdles in administering justice today is a delay. Delay in justice needs to be tackled by the joint efforts of all stakeholders. However, the harsh truth in today’s world is that we are progressing towards a society that is overrun by hordes of lawyers, hungry like locusts, and bridges of judges in numbers that have never been considered before. But it is wrong to believe that ordinary people want black-robed judges, well-dressed lawyers, fine-tuned courtrooms to resolve their disputes. People with legal issues, such as people with pain, want relief and want it as quickly and cheaply as possible and Injunction is just one of the methods to help those people in pain to seek relief.


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post Injunction: All you need to know about it appeared first on iPleaders.

Review, Appeal & Revision: All you need to know about it

$
0
0

This article is written by Aarchie Chaturvedi, a 1st-year student currently pursuing B.A.-LLB from NUSRL, Ranchi. This is an exhaustive article about review, appeal, and revision containing a brief analysis of each of them and comparison among them.

Introduction

It is human nature to make mistakes. Judges are also humans. So they’re no exception to this kind of behavior. A judge can make an error in the course of his duties as well. There is yet to be born a man who has not made a mistake.

For centuries now, the provisions of appeal review and revision have been a part of the law. These provisions are some important steps in the attempt to remove or reduce the errors by the judges.

Because one of the reasons behind law’s birth was to preserve the rights of the public. And so the existence of law becomes worthless when the judgment of any lawsuit goes wrong. People in situations where they are wronged, try to get the shelter of law. But when law fails to provide a person with the shelter, the person becomes helpless and loses his trust in law. It is, therefore, a common principle that the law should not be mistaken. But it’s very difficult not to make mistakes. For this reason, the provisions of appeal review and revision were born.

Review: Meaning of the term in the legal world

Review means when the court re-examines the decisions made by itself, the examination of any legislation made by the government or any act of the administrative organizations; it rectifies the error in an act, judgment, or legislation. According to many leading legal philosophers and luminaries, the main purpose of this law is to protect the rights of the people as the judgments made by the courts, not mostly, but at times are fallible. In the process of review, the court might either overturn the decision or make necessary changes in it. The constitution of India has provided us with enough provisions of review to make the principles of justice more efficient.

Article 32 allows the Supreme Court to issue directions or writs and gives the right to an individual to knock on the door of the court if his fundamental right has been infringed or violated. The Parliament can also entrust any other court with the jurisdiction to exercise the power of the Supreme Court. It allows the individual to avoid the extensive or lengthy legal procedure and directly file a case in the Supreme Court if his fundamental right has been violated. So, if there is any law or act of the government that encroaches upon the fundamental right of an individual, his rights will be enforced under this article. The law or the act will be reviewed by the court which makes it the most important article in the process of legal review. According to the Rules of the Supreme Court, such a request must be submitted within 30 days from the date of judgment or order.

Article 136 of the Indian Constitution, on the similar lines, gives the Supreme Court the discretionary powers to grant special leave to appeal from any judgment, order, decree, sentence or determination, in any cause, which has been passed by any court or tribunal. The Supreme Court thus enjoys being appellate in most of the cases. The Supreme Court often deals with cases that involve the ‘question of law’, where it thinks that the verdict given by the other court is not satisfactory. The discretionary power of the Supreme Court is subject to judicial review.

Article 226 of the Indian Constitution, on the lines of Article 32, vests powers like issuing writs and giving directions in the High Court. According to this article, a person whose fundamental rights have been violated can approach the High Court. The High Court can issue a direction to any government, person or organization. The High Court acts as a protector of the fundamental right and gives the ground for judicial review.

Article 227 of the Indian Constitution, gives the power of supremacy to the High Courts of India over other courts or tribunals within its jurisdiction (i.e. the courts that lie in its territory). The High Court can issue directions to the subordinate courts under this article and the courts are bound by it. The High Court enjoys the power of revision under articles 226 and 227 of the Constitution of India.

Review is one of the most important parts to ensure justice and this principle is almost present in every democratic country. Review enables an individual to ensure that his right is not violated by any act, any law made by the government or by an error of any court. Review truly holds together the concept of complete justice and separation of power and this function acts as the backbone of the democracy. If there had not been a system of review in the judicial process, then the law made by the government would not be subject to the examination or review by the court and the entire judicial process would become futile. The principle of judicial review ensures the principle of complete justice. The Supreme Court and the High Court have used this principle while delivering landmark verdicts like in the case of Vishaka v. State of Rajasthan, where the Supreme Court laid down the famous Vishaka guidelines.

Under the review petition, the binding judgments of the Supreme Court/High Court can be reviewed. Generally, in view of stare decisis (the legal principle of determining points in litigation according to precedent), courts do not disturb a ruling without a solid case. This review provision is thus an exemption from the legal stare decisis principle. Article 137 of the Constitution provides for the authority of the Supreme Court of India to revise any judgment it pronounced (or orders made) pursuant to Article 145 of the Constitution.

The concept of review is one of the important aspects in maintaining human rights, as the fundamental rights like the right to life, right to speech and expression and right to practice any religion are enforceable because of the process of judicial review. The contravention of these rights by the government or by any other legal person can be challenged in the court only by the process of judicial review. So, this makes it an indivisible part of the judicial process.

The concept also helps in maintaining the limits of the organization of a state, like courts or government organizations, and checking that there is no outreach of power by the organizations.

The constitution of India has classified the judicial review under three categories, that are:

  • Judicial review of constitutional amendments– The Supreme Court can check the constitutional amendment in order to see that it doesn’t violate any fundamental right or the basic structure of the constitution. The leading case, in this category, is Kesavananda Bharati v. Union of India.
  • Judicial review of legislation of Parliament, State Legislatures as well as subordinate legislation– The court can review the legislation in order to examine that the laws made don’t violate the fundamental rights and it is mainly done to check the limitations of the legislatures.
  • Judicial review of administrative action of the Union of India, as well as the State Governments and authorities falling within the meaning of State- The administrative functions of the governments of both the Union and the states, can be brought under check by the process of judicial review. 

Presidential pardon in terms of judicial review is also an important function of the Indian judicial system. The president can commute the capital punishment given to a person by the court on the grounds of morality and mercy. This process involves the President’s review, which is entirely in his hands. In the case of Kehar Singh v. Union of India, the Supreme Court held that the order of the president in the cases of mercy petition cannot be a subject of judicial review. 

Nature, scope and objectives

Judicial review enables a person to enforce his right that might have been overlooked by the administrative organs or the courts. In the process of judicial review, the court will not look into the merits, but into the law of the act. If it finds contravention to any dominant law at the time of review then it would set the decision aside.

The court can set aside any legislation made by the parliament or any act done by the government or any order passed by the inferior court if they find it to be unconstitutional or violative of the natural justice principle. The Supreme Court and the High Court can also issue writs, if the situation demands so, as a part of the process of safeguarding the fundamental rights.

The objective behind this procedure is to make review a tool to ensure complete justice and to enforce the fundamental rights of an individual. The purpose is to have a check over the working of the legislature, in order to check the constitutionality or legality of the laws made by them. The act ensures that the laws made by the legislature passed the litmus test of the constitution. Another objective behind this law is to rectify the legal errors made while delivering the verdicts.

https://lawsikho.com/course/diploma-companies-act-corporate-governance
             Click Above

Cases where review lies

Non-appealable cases– Non-appealable cases are cases where no right is given to the suffered party or when an appeal is rejected on the grounds of incompetence or being time-barred. The party who has suffered can hence file for review.

Where appeal lies but is not preferred- In cases where the benefit of an appeal lies but is not preferred by the party, the party can file for a review but the review must not be against the order because that would be going into the facts which are not entertained by the courts. When the party has already filed for an appeal before the court which is pending, in such cases the petition for review will not be entertained by the court. However, if the review petition is filed first and the appeal is filed subsequently then the court’s jurisdiction to review can’t be questioned under law.

What are the grounds of review cases?

  • Discovery of new evidence– When of new evidence or matter which is substantial to the case and was not in the cognizance of the concerned person, then that person can successfully apply for review. However, the burden of proof lies on the concerned person to prove that at the time of the verdict he was completely unaware of the fact or evidence that could have an influence in the decision making. However, the mere fact that the concerned party was not cognizant of the ruling in any other case which might have impacted the decision wouldn’t be considered by the court for review.
  • Error on the face of record– The prima facie error that looks pretty conspicuous without a legal analysis of the judgment can only be taken into account for review under this ground. The error or mistake could either be a mistake in law or a mistake in fact.
  • Other sufficient reason– This ground of review has given a very wide coverage of the reviewing process. In the landmark case of Chajju Ram v. Neki it was held that the sufficient reason shall be connected with the other two reasons in the least possible way. The mere fact that the court ignored an important fact will not make a valid point under this ground.

Who can file for a review?

  • Review can be filed by any person who feels himself to be deprived of rights or aggravated under the law or the rule of law under Rule 1 order 47 of the CPC.
  • Or; in non-appealable cases, where no right is given to the suffered party when an appeal is rejected on the grounds of incompetence or it being time-barred, then the party who has suffered can file for review.
  • Or; in cases where the benefit of an appeal lies but is not preferred by the party, the party can file for a review but the review must not be against the order because that would go into the merits which are not entertained by the courts. When the party has already filed for an appeal before the court which is pending, in such cases the petition for review will not be entertained by the court. However, if the review petition is filed first and the appeal is filed subsequently then the court’s jurisdiction to review can’t be questioned under law. 

Court of plenary jurisdiction

Under Article 136 of the Indian Constitution, the Supreme Court of India has the special power to grant special leave from any judgment, order or sentence made by any court or tribunal in the territory of India except to those belonging to the Armed Force Courts or tribunals. All adjudicating bodies that have been formed by the state can be counted as tribunals except the Armed Force Tribunal. Article 136 has a very wide scope as it vests the power of plenary jurisdiction in the Supreme Court by granting it the power to hear any appeal against any kind of judgment and pass an order related to the appeal if needed, so as to preserve the principle of justice. Thus plenary power truly stands upon the ideals of democracy as it makes sure that justice will always be served at last, and removes the concept of injustice by an error of law. The concept laid down by the constitution-makers was to prevent the miscarriage of justice. 

Suo motto review

In law, sua sponte or suo motu (on its own motion) describes the act of authority, to take up the matter without the request of the other party. This term is generally used for measures taken by a judge on his own, without a prior motion or application from the parties.

It is a well-known fact that even if time restrictions are imposed on the application, the Court has the power of suo moto to rectify its own mistakes. Where inherent powers are exercised, the issue of limitation does not preclude a solution. The decision making authorities can be vested with suo motu powers of review in the interest of justice. If there are strong reasons present for a judgment to be reviewed, then there is no excuse why the court should be restrained from exercising the power of review. 

Appeal

An appeal is asking a higher court to review and if needed, to reverse the decision of the lower court and to turn it in the losing party’s favor after the final judgment has been given. The losing party has to quote legal reasons as to why it feels the judgment of the lower court was wrong and why it should be overturned by the higher court. The losing party and the appellant here must show the errors or mistakes that were committed during the previous trial. The two grounds on which an appeal can be filed are:

  • When a mistake was committed in the trial– Only grave errors are counted under this provision. Harmless errors cannot be a ground for appeal. The appellant must also show that the error caused his rights to be infringed.
  • When evidence does not support the verdict– It is much harder to prove an appeal that is based on insufficient evidence. As the Court of Appeal did not hear the entire proceedings in the previous trial and didn’t make a fully unbiased decision. Based on their belief in the judgement of the trial court, most appeal courts weigh and then make their decision.

In civil suits, both the plaintiff and the defendant can file a suit for appeal. A defendant has the right to file an appeal unless the judgment came from the court of the highest order. Not every appeal is entitled to be entertained by the court as there can be an appellable error and thus on those grounds the appeal can be rejected. 

It must be kept in mind by the party when it decides to file an appeal that the appeal must be made in the limited time frame which varies depending upon the jurisdiction. However, the decision of the appellate court is not time-bound. The judges of the court of appeal take time to consider the issues and then make the final decision. This process can take weeks or even months.

Letters Patent Appeal (LPA)

Letters Patent Appeal is an appeal from a single bench to a larger bench of the same court. Such kind of appeal is dealt with, under Section 50(1) (b) of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 and has to be judged within already laid down parameters. This remedy was first provided after the establishment of High Courts in 1865. The decision given by the single judge bench can go wrong due to wrong facts or can even be wrong according to the law. In these cases, the appellant has the option to refer to a larger bench of the same court before going to the Supreme Court. Thus, this would save the expenses of going and filing a case under the Supreme Court. Such kind of an appeal is called an intra-court appeal when it is filed in the High Court and an inter-court appeal when it is filed under the Supreme Court. The maximum period for filing an inter court appeal is 30 days and filing an intra-court appeal is 90 days.

After paying the court fees the appellant who files for an LPA is required to carry the following documents with him to the proceeding:

  1.  Certified copy of judgment and decree appealed from.
  2.  Certified copy of certificate granted by the High Court. 
  3.  Certified copy of the order granting the said certificate.

However, it must also be noted that intra-court appeal is not maintainable in cases of criminal nature. 

Revision

Revision is a new prospect for the resolution of law. It means re-examining the case involving improper inference, non-exercise or inappropriate jurisdictional exercise. Where no appeal lies for a case, which is decided by the subordinate court, Section 115 of the Code of Civil Procedure gives the High Court the power to revise the matter. This jurisdiction is known as the High Court’s revisional jurisdiction. Revision refers to reviewing or scrutinizing with a view to correct or to improve.

In the exercise of revisional powers, it is not the responsibility of the High Court to take into consideration the benefits of the evidence; it merely has to see if the provisions of the law have been properly adhered to by the court whose order is the subject of the revision.

In Section 115 of the CPC, there are only three grounds for revision, which are: 

  • When the lower court meditates on a matter on which it has no jurisdiction.
  • There was authority, but it was not exercised.
  • Jurisdiction has been applied illegally or irregularly.

Section 115 shall thus prevent subordinate courts or lower courts from acting arbitrarily, illegally, irregularly or capriciously.

Distinction between Review and Appeal

  • When appealing to a court superior to the one that issued the verdict, the appellant will contest the inferior court’s decision with an appeal. The appeal is a motion to be tried again. An appeal to ask the higher court to amend the lower court’s decision is sought. The lower court’s decision may remain the same or it may be revised by the higher court. A review is not people’s statutory right and is applicable at the court’s discretion. A review is applied in the same court in which the original decision is taken and is a request to consider the legality of the ruling. A review is based on irregularity of procedures, impropriety, irrationality, and illicitness.
  • Section 114 and Order 47 of the CPC deal with review whereas Sections 96 to 112 and Orders 41 to 45 of the CPC deal with appeal.
  • There’s just one review. The second request for review does not lie. On the other hand, there are three appeals:
    • From District Munsiff Magistrate Court/Subordinate Judge’s Court to District Judges (First Appeal); 
    • From District Judge’s Court to the High Court(Second Appeal);
    • From the High Court to the Supreme Court (Third Appeal).
  • An appeal is referred to different judges whereas a review is referred to the same judge.
  • The grounds for appeal are wider in ambit than the ground for review.

Distinction between Review and Revision

  1. Review is contained in Section 114 and Order 47 of the CPC whereas revision is contained in Section 115 of the CPC.
  2. Review is given by the court which passed the decree or made the order whereas revision is executed only by the High Court.
  3. Review can be done only after the passing of the order whereas revision can be done when the case has been decided.
  4. The decree granting a review is appellable whereas the decree granting a revision is not appellable.
  5. The grounds for review are the discovery of new evidence, error on the face of the record and any other sufficient reason however the ground for revision is a jurisdictional error by the lower courts.

Conclusion

The maintenance of justice which is important for every society in a democracy is possible due to the presence of the Constitution. The principles of democracy have been preserved by the provisions of review. 

  • The provisions have been used by the appellate courts while delivering verdicts. The main principle behind review is to protect the sanctity of complete justice and protect the rights of the individual through the legal process that is dominion over the republic of India. Review not only protects the right but also the dignity of the individual and makes sure that there is no miscarriage of justice. 
  • Justice vs judiciary is a topic that has been a century-long debate but the review system acts as an invisible bridge and ensures harmony between both by the due procedure of law. The provision removes the possibility of human error while delivering verdicts and ensures that the rights of every individual are protected in the eyes of law. 
  • The concept of review gives the power to a person to enforce his rights to establish justice against injustice. The review system is also very essential for checking and balancing the overreaching acts that the government might perform in the course of administration. If the legislature makes any law or the government performs any act that contravenes the right of any person in India and that contravention per se is not allowed by law, then review acts as a tool to salvation for that person, and any such act or law passed will be set aside by the appellate court. 
  • The review system sets the tone for the proper functioning of the pillars of democracy by determining the limits of every governmental and judicial organ and is essential for effective coordination. The suo moto cognizance is one of the most influential tools to enhance the judicial review and the justice process. It gives the right to the supreme court to take cognizance of the injustice that’s happening in any part of the country and enforce justice by law and order. It thus provides a solution to the very famous lines “injustice anywhere is a threat to justice everywhere”.

Revision on the other hand clothes the High Court with the powers to ensure that the subordinate courts ‘ proceedings are conducted within the boundaries of their jurisdiction and in the furtherance of justice in accordance with the law. It allows the High Court to rectify, errors of jurisdiction committed by subordinate courts and provides the means to obtain rectification of a non-appealable order to an aggrieved party. In other words, revisional jurisdiction is conferred on the High Court for the effective exercise of its supervisory and visitorial powers. 

Appeal whereas ensures the litigants that they will be granted justice under the law while the resolution of a particular dispute and appeal also helps in enacting the rules of decision that will be binding on all lower courts within the judicial system, thus ensuring uniform treatment and some measure of certainty and guidance for those whose actions bring them within the scope of the rule.


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post Review, Appeal & Revision: All you need to know about it appeared first on iPleaders.

Directive Principles of State Policy: Articles 36 – 51 Under Indian Constitution

$
0
0

This article has been written by Avinash Kumar of 3rd-year pursuing B.com LLB from School of law, UPES Dehradun. This article discusses the concept of the Directive Principle of State Policy. In this article, I have mentioned all the provisions of the Directive Principle with the relevant case laws and tried to compare the fundamental right to the Directive Principle of State Policy.   

Introduction 

Part IV of the Indian Constitution defines the Directive Principle of State Policy (DPSP). Basically, the Directive Principles of State Policy have been borrowed from the Irish Constitution. The Directive Principles of State Policy are guidelines to the State which has been written in the Indian Constitution. But you can’t compel the State for their enforceability in a Court of Law. While the Fundamental Right is enforceable in a court of law. Directive Principle is a set of instructions that have to be followed by the lawmakers while making the policy for the citizens. 

Directive Principle of State Policy makes an obligation on the State to make good policies for the betterment of the society so that it could develop the Socio-economic conditions of the citizens.

The underlying object behind the Directive Principles

If the Union or State government made any law then it is the responsibility of the union or state government to follow the guiding principle of the state policy. The Objective behind the Directive Principles of State Policy is the welfare of the State. One of the important objectives behind the Directive Principles of State Policy is to achieve the goal of welfare state. The aim of the Directive Principle of State Policy is to improve the social and economic condition of the citizen so that they can enjoy the good life. Directive Principle of State Policy acts as a check and balance for the Government so that in the upcoming election a citizen of the country can cast their vote according to the performance of the previous government. 

The success and failure of the government can be judged by their Policies and Principles and if the government fails to implement the Directive Principle in the State in a proper way, then they can lose the upcoming election. That’s why the Directive Principle of State Policy makes an obligation on the State that within the time period by implementing the principle, State can achieve its goal.

Classification of the Directives

Social and Economic Charter 

A social order based on justice

Article 38(1) of the Indian Constitution talks about the social order based on justice. Article 38(1) says that it is the responsibility of the State to work for the welfare of the people. Social order includes the law and order. It also includes the Public order and the security of the state. That’s why it is the responsibility of the state to maintain public peace, public safety, public order. 

The state has a legal duty as well as a constitutional mandate to maintain the security of citizens.

Principles of policy to be followed by the State for securing economic justice

Article 39 of the Indian Constitution directs the State to follow the principles while making policy for the Citizen. 

  • Men and Women will have an equal right in the means of livelihood. 
  • It is the responsibility of the State to distribute the ownership and control of the material to the common people. 
  • It is the responsibility of the State to not discriminate on the basis of sex which means men and women will get equal pay for equal work.
  • The state has a responsibility to ensure the health of the children and workers.
  •  Article 39(b) also covers material resources. For the purpose of development,    construction of the house, for the purpose of providing public facilities like roads, playgrounds, bridges, the government can acquire the land of the Private owners.

Social Security Charter

Equal justice and free legal aid to economically backward classes

Article 39A of the Indian Constitution says that it is the duty of the State to provide free legal aid to all the citizen of the country. It is the responsibility of the State to make provisions and schemes regarding free legal aid so that economically backward classes can take the benefit of that. Legal Aid and Speedy trial is now a fundamental Right which comes under Article 21 of the Indian Constitution. Even all the prisoners can enjoy this right.

Organization of Village Panchayats

Article 40 of the Indian Constitution talks about Panchayati Raj System. It is the responsibility of the State to take all the steps for the establishment of the Panchayati Raj.

Panchayati Raj is the pillar of the Indian Political System. It is the oldest form of Local self-government. Panchayati Raj election is the grassroots of Indian Democracy. All the members of Panchayati Raj are elected by the democratic process. Panchayati Raj System has been inserted in the Constitution by the 73rd Constitutional Amendment in 1973. Rajasthan was the first state to adopt the Panchayati Raj System. The election of the Panchayati Raj System is conducted by the State Election Commission. State Finance Commission Provides the funds for the betterment of the Panchayati Raj system.

Panchayati Raj System has been inserted in the Indian Constitution by the 73rd Constitutional Amendment in 1992. 

On the recommendations of the Balwant Rai Committee, the Panchayati Raj System has been divided into three tiers:

  1. Village Panchayat;
  2. Panchayat Samiti;
  3. Zila Parishad.

Right to work, education and public assistance in certain cases

Article 41 of the Indian Constitution says that the State has a duty to provide employment, education and to provide help to those who are unemployed, and those who can’t take care of themselves like old age people. 

Just and human conditions of work

Article 42 of the Indian constitution directs the State to develop the condition of humans and provide maternity relief. 

A living wage for workers

Article 43 refers to the living wages for the workers, which means that the state has a responsibility to make a provision regarding the wages of the worker and wages should be as such that he can maintain all the basic necessities like clothes, food, shelter. 

Participation of workers in the management of Industries

Article 43 A of the Indian Constitution talks about the participation of workers in management of industries. Article 43 A says that through the legislation, State has a responsibility to secure the participation of workers.

Provision for early childhood care and education to children below the age of six years

Article 45 of the Indian Constitution directs the state to make provision regarding free and compulsory education to all children till the age of 14 years. The reason behind free education to all the children is to eradicate the illiteracy rate. 

In the case of Unni Krishnan v. the State of A.P, the Apex Court held that the Right to education, up to the age of 14 years is a Fundamental Right and it will come under the purview of Article 21 that is Right to life and personal liberty. In the 86th Constitutional Amendment, a new Article has been inserted that is Article 45 which says that the State shall provide childhood care and free education to all children till the age of six years. 

Promotion of educational and economic interest of weaker sections

Article 46 of the Indian Constitution grants the power to State to do promotion of the educational and economic interests of Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes, and other weaker sections of the society. The state has also the responsibility to protect them from all forms of exploitation and injustice from society. 

Duty to raise the standard of living and improvement of health

Article 47 of the Indian Constitution makes an obligation on the State to improve the level of nutrition and maintain the standard of living. It also makes an obligation on the State to improve the condition of public health. 

The state has the power to prohibit all intoxicating drinks and drugs which are injurious to health except medical purposes. 

Community Welfare Charter

Uniform Civil Code

 

Article 44 of the Indian Constitution states that it is the duty of the State to secure for the citizens a Uniform Civil Code throughout the territory of India.

Basically, the Uniform Civil Code means a set of laws through which all the personal laws of the different religions will come under one platform and governed by a single law. But currently, in India, each religion has a separate personal law and they follow their personal law. Goa is the only State to have a Uniform Civil Code.

Shah Bano Case

The first issue regarding the Uniform Civil Code arose in the case of the Shah Bano case. In the case of Shah Bano’s case, her husband Ahmad khan divorced her and denied to give maintenance. Shah Bano moved the Supreme Court for the maintenance under Section 125 of Cr.PC.

The Supreme Court gave the judgment in favor of shah bano on the ground that Section 125 of Cr.PC. is applied to all citizens of the country irrespective of their Religion. But, the Muslim community was not ready to accept the judgment of the Supreme Court. Many protests were organized by the protesters against the judgment of the Supreme Court. Protester’s contention was that the Supreme Court doesn’t have any right to interfere in the personal laws.

After this case the Rajiv Government came up with a new law that is Muslim Women (Protection of Right on Divorce) Act 1986, which nullified the judgement of the Supreme Court. The Act states that in the Divorce matter the Personal law will prevail.

In the Act, it was also mentioned that in the Divorce matter Muslim men will have the right to give maintenance only till the time of Iddat Period, that is 90 days from the Divorce. After that, the liability of paying the maintenance will shift to the Waqf Board.  

Sarla Mudgal Case

There was an NGO named Kalyani, and Sarla Mudgal was the President of the Kalyani NGO who had fought for the Meena Mathur. Under the Hindu Personal Law, Meena Mathur was married to Jitendar Mathur. As per Muslim Law, there is a provision that Muslim men can marry as many as four wives during his lifetime. After that Jitendra Mathur Converted into Islam and married another girl and that girl also converted into Islam.

Sarla Mudgal filed a case against the Jitendar Mathur. The contention from the advocate of Jitendra Mathur was given that he has married under the Muslim law, which permits the second marriage. 

But the Supreme Court gave the Judgement in favor of Meena Mathur and held that Islamic Law permits four marriage but conversion for the purpose of marriage is an abuse of Personal Laws. 

Further Court clarified that Hindu marriage will be dissolved only under the Hindu Marriage Act. In order to prevent such type of marriage Court also quoted that UCC should be implemented in order to prevent similar types of matters.

https://lawsikho.com/course/certificate-criminal-litigation-trial-advocacy
            Click Above

Promotion of Co-operative Societies

Promotion of Co-Operative Societies has been added by the 97th Amendment 2011. The state has a responsibility to promote Co-Operative Societies. Co-Operative societies include the management, control, functions.  

The organization of agriculture and animal husbandry

Article 48 of the Indian Constitution talks about the Organisation of agriculture and animal husbandry. It is the responsibility of the State to organize agriculture and animal husbandry. Article 48 also directs the State to prohibit the Slaughtering of cows and calves and another dairy animal.

Protection and improvement of forests and wildlife

Article 48A of the Indian Constitution says that it is the responsibility of the state to take all the necessary steps to protect the environment, forest, and wildlife animals. In the M.C Mehta case, the Supreme Court has held that the State has a responsibility to take steps to improve the quality of polluted water.  

Protection of monuments and places and objects of national importance

Article 49 of the Indian Constitution grants the power to the State to take care of and protect monuments and historical places. State also has a responsibility to protect the Ancient and historical monuments. 

Separation of Judiciary from Executive

Article 50 of the Indian Constitution talks about the Separation of Judiciary from Executive. Judiciary is an independent body. The guardian of the constitution is Judiciary. If the executive will start working like judiciary then there will be a clash of power that’s why Article 50 separates the judiciary from the executive. 

However, in some cases, judicial functions are performed by the executive. 

Like in the Appointment of Judges they are appointed by the Executive.

However, in the matter of Pardoning and Reprieve Executive enjoys that Right. 

Promotion of International Peace and security

Article 51 of the Indian Constitution talks about the Promotion of International Peace and Security. It is the responsibility of the State to Promote peace and security with another country. 

It is the responsibility of the State to maintain good relations with another country. Good relations with another country help the State in many ways.

There are many international laws and treaties that were signed between the two State so it is the obligation on State to Respect or obey all the treaties and International Law. It also says that if any dispute arises between the two State then it is the responsibility of the State to settle the dispute by Arbitration.

The relation between Directive Principles and Fundamental Rights

Fundamental Right limits the power of the Government while making any law which means that the Government doesn’t have any authority to make a law that is inconsistent with the Fundamental Right. But the Directive Principle of State Policy are guidelines to state for achieving certain goals. If your fundamental right has been violated then you can go to the court by Article 32 but in violation of the Directive Principle of State policy, you can’t go to the court. 

Nowadays, there are many debates that run that there is no use of Directive Principles of State Policy in the State because it is not enforceable in the Court but in the current scenario, it  plays an important role for the betterment of the society.

You can read the Directive Principle of State Policy into the Fundamental Right. You can take the example of the Right to education.

The Directive Principle of State Policy expands the ambit of the fundamental rights. 

In the past, there are many judicial pronouncements that have been pronounced by the Apex Court in which they draw the line between them. 

Madras v. Champakam Dorairajan

In this case, the Apex Court held that the Directive Principle of State policy is the subsidiary to the Fundamental Right because Fundamental Right is enforceable in a Court of law while the Directive Principle of State Policy is not. Directive Principle of State Policy will run according to the Fundamental Right.

Re Kerala Education Bill

In the case of Re Kerala education bill, the Supreme Court held that there is no conflict between the Fundamental Right and Directive Principle of State Policy. Fundamental Right and Directive Principle of State policy are Complementary and Supplementary to each other. 

Further, the Court held that they are elastic and wide in nature so that in the future it can change according to the needs of the Society. Supreme Court held that the Directive Principle of State Policy is the Integrated scheme.     

Minerva Mills Case

In Minerva Mills case, the Supreme Court observed that fundamental rights are not the end of the path and end are specified in the Directive Principle of State Policy. Further, the Court explained that you can’t give primacy to one. One has to give priority to both. 

The harmony and balance between the Fundamental Rights and Directive Principle of State Policy is an essential feature of the Constitution. 

Ashok Kumar Thakur v. UOI

In this case, the Court held that you can’t make the distinction between the Set of Rights. Fundamental Right has a different goals while Directive Principle of State Policy has a different goals. Fundamental Right Represent the Civil and Political Right while the Directive Principle of State Policy represents the Social and Political Right. Further, the Court explained that the Directive Principle of State Policy is not enforceable in a court of law that doesn’t mean that these are subordinate.  

Directive Principles have given the status of Fundamental Rights: A New Dimension

It is true that by the judicial pronouncements the court has given a new dimension to the  Directive Principles of State Policy. In some cases, the Directive Principle of State Policy interpreted the concept of a fundamental right. 

In the Unnikrishnan case, the Supreme Court changed the status of the Directive Principle into the Fundamental Right. That’s why the status of Article 45 of the Indian Constitution has been changed from the Directive Principle into the Fundamental Right. So that from the age of 6 to 14 years, it is the responsibility of the State to provide free and compulsory education to all children. And it is enforceable in a Court of Law. There is another example that has taken the shape of a Fundamental Right is Equal Pay for Equal Work. In the case of Randhir Singh, the Supreme Court held that Equal pay for equal work is a Fundamental Right and it is enforceable in a Court of Law.

In the case of M.H. Hoskot vs State of Madras the Supreme Court held that fair legal aid is an integral part of a fair procedure of court and it is the duty of the government to provide free legal aid. Free legal aid comes under Article 21 of Indian Constitution. While in the case of Hussainara Khatun vs Home Secretary, State of Bihar, Supreme Court held that detention of under trial prisoners is a violation of Article 21 and Right to a Speedy trial is a fundamental Right Speedy trial is the Fundamental Right of the citizen which will come under Article 21 of the Indian Constitution.

Difference between DPSP And Fundamental Rights

Fundamental Right

Directive Principle of State Policy

  1. Article 12 to 35 of Indian Constitution deals with Fundamental Right. It is in part III of the Indian Constitution. 
  1. Article 36 to 51 of Indian Constitution deals with Directive Principle of State Policy. It is in part IV of Indian Constitution. 

2. They are negative in nature because they prohibit the State from doing certain things. 

2. They are positive in nature because it require the State to do certain things. 

3. Fundamental Rights are enforceable in a Court of law. 

3. Directive Principle aren’t enforceable in a court of law. 

4. Fundamental Rights promote the welfare of Individual.

4. Directive principle promote the welfare of the Community. 

5. For the implementation of Fundamental Right it doesn’t require any legislation.

5. Directive Principle require legislation for the implementation. 

 

DPSP and Amendment

If the Union Government thinks that there is a need to amend the Directive Principle or to add something then Parliament has the power to amend or add something in the Directive Principle by the Special Majority. There are many amendments which has been done by the Parliament. 

42nd Amendment Act, 1976

In the 42nd Amendment 1976, the Parliament has made four Amendments in the Directive Principle. Article 39 of the Indian Constitution Parliament has made an obligation on State to secure a social order for the promotion of the welfare of the People. 

After that Parliament has added a new Article that is Article 39A which says that it is the duty of the State to provide equal justice to all and free legal aid. The 42nd Amendment Act Parliament has added a new Article that is Article 48A which says that it is the duty of the state to Protect the Environment and to improve the quality of water and air through all possible ways. 

44the Amendment Act, 1978

The 44th Amendment of the Indian Constitution made an obligation on State to take all steps to eradicate the inequalities in the income of the Individual and to give the facilities to the Individual and the group of people who are residing in the different areas. 

73rd Amendment Act, 1992

By the 73rd Constitutional Amendment, Parliament has added the Panchayat in Part IX of the Indian Constitution which talks about the Organisation of Village Panchayat.

86th Amendment Act, 2002

By the 86th Constitutional Amendment, a new Article has been inserted in the Constitution that is Article 21A which says that the Right to education is a Fundamental Right. It creates an obligation on the State to provide free and compulsory education to all the children who belong to 8 to 14 years of age. If the state fails to do so then you can sue in a court of law.  

97th Amendment Act, 2011

Article 43B was added in the Indian Constitution which is related to the co-operative societies. It directs the State to take all the necessary steps to promote the voluntary formation, autonomous functioning, democratic control and professional management of the co-operative societies

Judicial Pronouncement 

Time to time there are many conflicts that arose regarding the supremacy of Fundamental Right over the Directive Principle of State Policy. 

The question was whether the Fundamental Right is superior to the Directive Principle of State Policy or not? So through many judicial pronouncements, the Supreme Court has cleared their stand on that. 

State of Madras vs Champkam Doraijan ( AIR 1951 SC 226 ) 

In this case, the Supreme Court held that if a Parliament made a law which contravenes the Fundamental Right then that law would be void but it will not apply to the Directive Principle of State Policy. It shows that fundamental rights are on higher pedestal than Directive principles of state policy. The subsidiary of Fundamental Right is the Directive Principle of State Policy. Directive Principle will operate according to the fundamental Right. 

In kerala education bill (1959 1 SCR 995) 

In this case, the Supreme Court gave the new principles that is the Principle of Harmonious Construction. In this case the Apex Court said that if there is any conflict between the Fundamental Right and Directive Principle of State Policy then the Doctrine of Harmonious Construction will apply. However if in case any conflict remains after applying the Principle of Harmonious construction then the Fundamental Right will prevail over the Directive principles of state policy.

Golaknath & Ors. v. State of Punjab (1967 AIR 1643) 

In this case, the Supreme Court held that Parliament can’t amend the fundamental Right of the Indian Constitution. Another significant issue in this case was whether Amendment is a “law” under the meaning of Article 13(2). Article 39(b) and Article 39(c) come under the purview of the Directive Principle of State Policy and in giving effect to these articles if that law violates Article 14, 19 and 31 of Indian Constitution then that law can’t be declared as Unconstitutional.

Keshvananda Bharti v. State of Kerala (1973) 4 SCC 225),          

In this case, the Supreme Court placed the Directive Principle of State Policy on a higher Position than the Fundamental Right. In the Minerva Mills case, there was a question that whether the Directive Principle of State Policy has supremacy over that. Then, in this case, the Apex Court has decided that the Doctrine of Harmonious Construction will apply. 

Both are Complementary to each other and for the better function of the State, both should be balanced.

Unnikrishna v. State of Andra Pradesh (1993 SCC (1) 645) 

In this case, the Court was of the view that Fundamental Rights and Directive principles are not exclusive to each other therefore they shouldnt be read in exclusion. The goal of the Directive Principle of State Policy can be achieved only through the means of Fundamental Right.   

Conclusion 

You can’t deny the importance of the Directive Principle of State Policy. It plays an equivalent role. You can’t abhor the Directive Principle just because it is not enforceable in a Court of Law rather they are the guiding principle for the State. It is the responsibility of the State to apply these principles while at the time of making laws. However, it is not enforceable in a court of law but the Directive Principle of State Policy is the backbone of the Fundamental Right. The main reason behind the Directive Principle is to strengthen the condition of the people. It is just like a structure and policy through which the Government makes the law. Nowadays there are many Directive Policy which are taking the shape of the fundamental right. India is a democratic country and government change after every five years and every government makes new laws so in that situation Directive Principles of State Policy plays a vital role because every government has to follow these principles while making the laws for the Country.


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content. 

The post Directive Principles of State Policy: Articles 36 – 51 Under Indian Constitution appeared first on iPleaders.

Do you know how to get a building plan approval?

$
0
0

This article is written by Mateen Qureshi, pursuing a Certificate Course in Real Estate Laws from LawSikho.com. Here he discusses “Do you know how to get a building plan approval?”.

Introduction

Getting a Building Plan approved is a cumbersome process in India. Commencing a building construction without the permission of required authorities is illegal and the constructed portion of that building is liable for demolition and the developer will be prosecuted for the said act. Therefore, the developer has to ensure that all the necessary permissions and approvals are obtained from the relevant authorities before commencing the construction. Different authorities are set up to deal with different permissions required for approval of the project. The process differs not only from State to State but it also varies for different cities.  The Building permission is granted subject to very stringent scrutiny. This involves various stages starting with the identification and authenticity of the land, the geo-location, if the building conforms to all the standards of safety and regulation, the distance from the road, distance from surrounding buildings, height and other criteria set by the Municipal authorities, along with the building plan.

Let us look at the comprehensive step by step procedure of how to get a building plan approval in the city of Pune.

Title

Firstly, the developer/builder has to get a clear title of the land on which he proposes to undertake construction. He has to ensure that he is the owner of the land. He has to show that the land is free from encumbrances and it should not be in any other person’s possession, nor there should be any charges  ie lien/mortgage over the land, there should not be a dispute of any kind over it nor any financial or heirship claims. If the land is given to the developer/builder for redevelopment the development right should have been given to the developer/builder by the landowner. For that purpose, the developer/builder has to furnish a development agreement between him and the landowner or a development agreement cum power of attorney. The time required for obtaining a clear title/ownership certificate is 15 days and the cost for is Rs 50/- per CTS No/Property Card Registration. The title/ownership certificate is provided by the Revenue Department.

Land Clearance

There are different zoning laws for different zones which regulate the development, construction,  and usage of real estate properties in India. Land-use zoning in India is classified into categories such as residential, multi-family, commercial and specific zones created to segregate real estate properties. If the land was an agricultural land and has been converted into a non-agricultural land which is being developed for residential or commercial use the developer/builder has to obtain permission from the Urban Development department and once the use of the land is converted after being approved by the town planning department and the municipal authority the State Urban Development Ministry has to notify it in official gazette. The Maharashtra Town Planning department forwards the proposals to the concerned authorities for granting zonal approvals. Zonal Development Plan should be Airport Authority Cleared. Building Plan could be passed and sanctioned by certified architects, monitoring of the project by the municipality. Non-agriculture permission not required for land within Municipal Limits.

Submit Building Plan

Now here comes a major role of the Architect. The developer/builder’s architect has to submit the building plan for approval. He has to submit the proposed plan with all the required documents now the proposal goes for two levels of check. First level scrutiny check is done by Assistant Town Planning/Municipal officer and the second level scrutiny check is done by the Chief Officer. If the file is in order and complete he can proceed to pay the scrutiny fees. The ATP/Municipal Engineer verifies the documents uploaded by the applicant. Once the documents/drawings are verified, the site visit is done for the proposal. Engineer/ATP himself go for site visit inspection and fill in the questionnaire drafted for a site visit of Building Permission. Consolidated Scrutiny is also performed based on the comparison of drawings uploaded, the proposal details and the DC rules. On successful inspection, the application is verified with remarks and then is forwarded to the Chief Officer for further round of inspection. Chief Officer will re-verify all the documents and the Scrutiny inspection report of the proposal. Chief Officer will check for any concession/relaxation requested and check whether to allow for any concession/relaxation on the proposal. Once the proposal is approved, the applicant needs to pay the other approval charges (Development charges, labour cess, etc.) Once the fees have been paid the application file is then forwarded to the concerned officer of the Building Proposal Department. Then the file is forwarded to the Survey Office, which makes its remarks on the application file and checks the remarks from the Development Plan office (obtained during the design stage of the project). If the Survey Office is satisfied with its review, it will send the application file back to the Building Proposal Department within one week. The application varies for residential and commercial projects. A sub-engineer from the Building Proposal Office will conduct a site inspection within 3 to 4 days of receiving the file from the survey office. The date and time of the site inspection are arranged by the company’s architect. The building company must be on-site when the inspection takes place. The sub-engineer scrutinizes the potential of the plot including the provision of civic infrastructure. The inspector will take photographs of the site and surroundings and upload it. The developer/builder can then check the site visit report to view it.

Sample list of scrutiny questions of the site report is:

  1. Is the location as per the approved plan layout of the Town and Country Planning Department?
  2. Do the boundaries tally or not tally as per plan and as on-ground position?
  3. Is the ownership of approach road Public or Private?
  4. What is the nature of approach road (a) Kaccha road (b) Water Bound Macadam (WBM) (c) Bituminous (BT)? (d) Cement Concrete.
  5. Are there any services on the approach road (a) Drains (b) Storm Water Drains (c) Telephone wires (d) Electricity?
  6. What is the nature of the proposed site? Site Topology (a) Slope of the site (b) Plain Land (c) Undulated land (d) Rocky Terrain.
  7. Are there any structures on the site (a) Plain structure (b) Temporary structure (c) No structure?
  8. Is the site within the vicinity of the structure identified by the archaeological department?
  9. Are there any nature of water body (a) Nala (b) Canal (c) Lakes (d)Streams?
  10. Does the proposed site falls under restricted zones like Defense area/Air funnel zone/CRZ area/Blue Line/Red Flood Line, etc.
  11. Are there any trees on the site?
  12. Are the trees going to be demolished?
  13. Is the site covered by (a) Temple (b) Religious Structures (c) Open wall (d) Graveyard (e) Heritage structure?
  14. Is the site filled with offences materials like carcasses or excreta?
  15. Is there proper sanitation on the site?

Obtain “Intimation of disapproval” IOD from the Building proposal department

After the site is inspected the developer/builder’s application file is sent back to the Building Proposal Office to get an Intimation of Disapproval (IOD) (authorization) it is also known as Building Permit in some places. IOD are instructions which a developer/builder has to comply within an under-construction project. The concerned officer i: e the Sub-Engineer scrutinizes the report and forwards it to the assistant engineer and executive engineer.  If everything is proper the executive engineer approves it. The Intimation of disapproval is (IOD) comes with a list of objections which the developer/builder must procure from different departments and authorities. An Intimation of Disapproval (IOD) is issued after the redevelopment plans are submitted to the Building Proposal Department of the Municipal Corporation.

Submit structural plans approved by a structural engineer to the Pune Municipal Corporation

Once the developer/builder obtains an Intimation of Disapproval (IOD) he has to apply for a review of structural plans which is done simultaneously with the No Objection Process (NOC).

Non Agriculture Permission

As we saw earlier that if the land was an agricultural land and has been converted into a non-agricultural land which is being developed for residential or commercial use the developer/builder has to obtain permission from the Urban Development department and once the use of the land is converted after being approved by the town planning department and the municipal authority the State Urban Development Ministry has to notify it in official gazette. It is a cumbersome and time-consuming process. The permission is granted by the Revenue Department.

Obtain “No Objection Certificate “(NOC) from Tree Department of the Pune Municipal Corporation

Trees cutting is taken very seriously by the Municipal Authority as the laws enacted are stringent in this regard. Maharashtra (urban areas) Preservation of Trees Authority Act 1957 has set up a Tree Authority in all Municipal Corporations in the State of Maharashtra. A Tree authority commission has also been setup under the said Act. This Commission meets once every month. If there are trees on the proposed construction site this has to be brought to the notice of the authority and the Commission decides which trees are to be cut (if any). If any trees are cut down as a result of the construction the developer/builder has to plant the same amount of trees somewhere else as a replacement of the chopped trees.

Obtain a No Objection Certificate (NOC) from Electricity Department

The developer/builder has to submit a copy of the building approval plan along with an application to the electricity department of the Municipal Corporation about the electricity requirement of the project construction.  The concerned officer of the electricity department shall survey to determine the projects power requirement.

Obtain a No Objection Certificate (NOC) from Traffic and Coordination Department

The authority deals with comprehensive transport plan, coordinate between city development plan and regional transport plan, unification of various modes of transport, unification of basic infrastructure of multi-modal transport hubs, selection of organization for operating the multi-modal infrastructure, BRTS, financial planning, technology for operationalizing the transport system, involving the government and private organizations through PPP mode, ensuring consensus among various organizations on transport issue, research and knowledge gathering on transport, training in transport sector.

Obtain a No Objection Certificate (NOC) from the Municipal Sewerage Department

The developer/builder has to submit an application by a licensed plumber or architect to the Pune Municipal Corporation at the concerned ward office. The NOC is issued within 15 days from the receipt of application. The application can be submitted online or to the Additional City Engineer, Sewerage department through a licensed plumber along with the scanned copies of the following documents.

https://lawsikho.com/course/certificate-real-estate-rera

Click Above

  1. Ownership Document (PRC/ 7/12 Extract)
  2. Copy of the Licensed plumber.
  3. Plan for drainage connection with the site plan.
  4. Property Tax NOC.

After the application is submitted along with the documents attached by the licensed plumber the construction site is visited and if everything is proper the approval is given by the Dy. Engineer of the drainage department. Connection charges should be paid by challan at the respective ward office. A list of licensed plumbers is provided on the PMC (Pune Municipal Corporation) website and also at the Additional City Engineer, Sewerage Department at the main building of the Corporation Pimpri Chinchwad.

Obtain a No Objection Certificate (NOC) from the Municipal Storm Water and Drain Department

The developer/builder has to obtain a No Objection Certificate from the Storm Water and DrainDepartment in the Pune Municipal Corporation.

Obtain a No Objection Certificate (NOC) from the Chief Fire Officer

The Maharashtra Fire Prevention and Life Safety Measures Act, 2006 mandates every developer/builder to obtain a Fire License or NOC to obtain a Building Plan Approval from the Maharashtra Urban Development department.

The documents required to obtain it are:

  1. Slip of the payment of Fire Protection Fund Fees and Additional Fire Protection Fund Fees paid to MIDC.
  2. Photograph of the fire system in working condition.
  3. Alarm or Ventilation consultant certificate.
  4. Applied for Number of towers(With tower numbers and name)
  5. As-built area statement from Licensed Architect with floor wise area and indicating the total cover area on each floor.
  6. Certificate of Compliance with Provisional Fire Approval submitted by License Agency appointed by the company.
  7. No Dues Certificate from MIDC Accounts Dept. (only if charges are paid in the incremental condition).

The process of obtaining Fire NOC can be completed in 15 days from the date of application received along with the required documents.

The concerned authority responsible for issuing No objection certificate or fire license is listed below:

If the Built-up area is up to 10,000 sq. Meters and building height is up to 24 Meters the Divisional Fire Officer sanctions the NOC.

If the Built-up area is up to 15,000 sq. Meters and building height is up to 30 Meters the Deputy Chief Fire Officer sanctions the NOC.

If the Built-up area exceeds 15,000 sq. Meters and building height exceeds 30 Meters the Chief Fire Officer sanctions the NOC.

Obtain Environmental Clearance

Increasing construction activities have a severe impact on the environment. The developer/builder has to hire an environmental consultant and get an Environmental Impact Assessment Report prepared by him which is to be submitted to the State Level Expert Appraisal Committee which in turn refers it to the State Environment Impact Assessment Authority. A project with more than 20000 sq Mt area requires environmental clearance in the city of Pune.

Obtain No Objection Certificate (NOC) form the Coastal Zone Management Authority

The developer/builder has to obtain a NOC from the Coastal Zone Management Authority if the project is near the Coastal Area.

Obtain Borewell Registration Certificate

Maharashtra is one of the few states which has enacted the Groundwater (Regulation for Drinking Water Purposes) Act. It is enacted to regulate the overexploitation of watersheds and prohibition of construction of new wells. The developer/builder has to obtain a Borewell Registration Certificate. 

Obtain No Objection Certificate (NOC) from Airport Authority of India

The developer/builder has to obtain a NOC for height clearance from the Airport Authority of India. The construction work shall not start before the issue of NOC. The builder/developer who is constructing a building which is up to 20 km from the visual flight and the height of the desired structure is more than 150 meters above the ground level has to obtain a NOC from the Airport Authority of India. NOC can be obtained by the Airport Authority of India on behalf of the Central Government in respect of All Civil Aerodromes. For Defense Aerodromes NOC for height, clearance is issued by respective defense authorities. A building with a maximum height of 70 Meters can be erected in the area of Pune City Municipal Corporation depending upon the area of plot and width of the road.  Some of the defense authorities are:

  1. Indian Air force
  2. Indi Navy
  3. Indian Coast Guard
  4. Hindustan Aeronautics Limited.

The revised list of Civil and Defense airport can be viewed on the AAI website.

The documents required to apply for NOC from AAI are:

  1. Signed print out of submitted online NOC application with NOC ID.
  2. Site Location, Plan, duly approved and authenticated by the Municipal authorities/Urban Development Authority.
  3. Surveyed site Elevation from a qualified professional or an agency, authorized for the purpose by the concerned department or the Municipal Authority.
  4. Undertaking on Form 1A provided on the AAI website on a Non-Judicial Stamp Paper of Rs 10/-.

Ancient Monument Approval

With rapid urbanisation, the monuments are facing tremendous pressure of increased construction activity. National Monuments Authority is mandated to regulate such construction activity within the vicinity of the monuments. Construction activities are prohibited and regulated within 100 metres to 300-metre distance from monuments. The developer/builder has to obtain a Certificate from the Director of Archaeological Department, Maharashtra State, showing that the lands under project do not include monuments notified by the Archaeological Department, Heritage buildings and Precincts. Such certificate should also mention the distance to be kept around such places if any. The application for NOC shall be made at least 3 months before the commencement of the construction activity.

Permission for Excavation/Royalty payment

In a judgment by the Supreme Court of India by Justice Ranjan Gogoi the Supreme Court held the Government is not entitled to any royalty if the developer/builder excavates for laying building foundation.  The judgement can be accessed here:

https://sci.gov.in/jonew/judis/42142.pdf.

Road Access/Highway/Expressway Permission

Without prior approval from the Highway Authority, no one is allowed to construct, form or layout any means of access to or from a highway, or erect any building or materially alter any existing building, extend any excavation or construct or form or layout any work. Parallel service roads for a two-way traffic is necessary for constructing or erecting any building near the highway. Minimum 12 Metre parallel road has to be provided.

For buildings near Expressway: buildings should be located at a distance of 15m from an expressway (the distance between the center of the road and building will be 60m),

National highway: buildings should be located at a distance of  3 to 6m from the National Highway (the distance between the center of the road and the building will be 60m),

State highway: buildings should be located at a distance of 4.5m from the state highway (the distance between the centre of the road and building will be 20m).

 Similarly, the buildings should be located at a distance of 4.5m from the district highway (the distance between the centre of the road and the building will be 15m).

Lift/Escalator Installation

The developer/builder has to obtain permission from the Public Works Department for installation of a lift/escalator. A separate license is required to operate it. The Maharashtra Lifts, Escalators, and Moving Walking Acts states that 

  1. Every owner of a place intending ( i ) to install a lift in such a place, or (ii) to make additions or alterations to a lift installed at such a place is required to apply in form A’ to the Inspector of lifts before any work in connection with the installation of the lift or addition or alteration thereto is started. Every such application should be accompanied by two sets of plans of the installation or, as the case may be of the additions and alterations.
  2. On receipt of an application, the inspector of lifts inquires and makes the applicant furnish the required information and then forwards it with his remarks to the Public Works Department, Chief Engineer (Electrical), who may, thereupon, either grant or refuse the permission applied for.The time required to issue a permit to install a lift is-4 Weeks,  Intimation of Remarks raise by Inspector of Lifts is within –1Week, 
    Time required for issuing permission to install a lift after compliance of the remarks raised by the Inspector of Lifts is -4Weeks.

Here is a sample of Form A for application for installation of lifts

Form A
(See rule 3) 

Application for permission to install Lifts *or for making additions or alterations to Lift installed
(To be submitted to the Inspector of Lifts, Bombay, Public Works Department, Bombay)


Full name and address of the owner ————————————————————

Name and address of the agent of the owner if any——————————————-

Address of the premises where the lift is to be installed————————————
*or for making additions or alterations.

Whether a license has been previously granted (details to be given)————————

Address of the premises where the lift is to be installed————————————-

Name and address of the firm who will install the lift —————————————–
*or make additions or alterations.

Type and make of the lift proposed to be erected———————————————-
(A sketch of the lift and erection plans should be attached)

The rated maximum speed of the lift car——————————————————–

The maker’s or designer’s rated capacity in weight——————————————–

The maximum number of passengers in addition to
the lift operator which the lift can carry.—————————————————–

The total weight of the lift car carrying the maximum load———————————–

The weight of the counterweight —————————————————————

The number, description, weight and size of the supporting cables————————-

Bottom clearance ———————————————————————————

Top clearance ————————————————————————————-

Details of the construction of the overhead arrangement
With the weight and sizes of the beams ——————————————————–

Water Connection  

The developer/builder has to apply to the waterworks department to get a water connection. The documents required for getting a water connection are

1) Duly filled in the application form for new water connection

 2) Receipt of payment of property tax or date of application 

3) Location map of the property 

4) Affidavit in a prescribed format.

The connection charges depend on the type of water taps and the diameter of the road.

Conclusion

Getting various construction approvals from the concerned departments is a time consuming process. Most of the departments do not follow the timelines laid down. When questioned for such delays the Authorities defend themselves by citing shortage of staff to shrug off their responsibility. This causes a delay in the timely delivery of projects and increase in the construction costs. Implementations of norms for approvals should be strictly monitored. The department personnel should be trained for dealing for such approvals only then it may improve the efficiency of the staff and streamline the approval process.


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post Do you know how to get a building plan approval? appeared first on iPleaders.


How taking up pro bono work makes a difference in your career as a lawyer

$
0
0

This article is written by Yavanika ShahTeam LawSikho.

Are you someone who blames not getting enough clients on being a first-generation lawyer?

Or someone who is trying to seek answers to why are you not getting enough recognition despite burning the midnight oil?

Pro bono work, done strategically can give you the solution you need.

You may have heard that a good lawyer need not engage in business development or promotional activities and that in fact, such practices are unethical in the legal profession! That’s not true.

Building a law practice or a law firm requires strategic thinking, focused efforts, and great execution. It is important to think of your practice or law firm as a business, a form of entrepreneurship. Most lawyers put zero effort towards building their practice. 

Very few lawyers consider pro bono work to be an avenue to establish credibility or grow their practice fast. Many consider it to be charity or distraction. However, strategically done, pro bono activities can make a huge difference in your professional development as well as the growth of your practice.

In most cases, owing to the low remuneration a lawyer earns during his early years makes him completely abandon the idea of going pro bono, which is the biggest misconception among the legal fraternity.

How can pro bono work lead to practice growth?

#1 Solidifying relationship with the Bar and Bench 

Early on in your career, one of your biggest goals as a lawyer should be to develop a strong reputation among the who’s who of the legal fraternity who can guide you, mentor you. People who know your skills, people who appreciate you, people who can not only vouch for your work but recommend you to projects, so as to expand your professional footprint is very important.

How can pro bono work help with that?

When senior lawyers see that you are doing free work for the underprivileged, or organizations and public causes that deserve the support of lawyers, they begin to respect you for your public service. You immediately stand out from the masses of junior faces desperate to interact with the best of the best in the industry.

When you are working on important public causes, many senior lawyers will happily guide you or pitch in with their expertise so you succeed in your public cause endeavors.

Even judges notice that you are selflessly working for people, and come to respect and honor your efforts. 

By doing pro bono work, you will earn the goodwill of many seniors who will then be extremely pleased to support you rather than you desperately trying to get their attention.

#2 Pro bono work gives you an opportunity to get started when you don’t have clients

Nobody wants to give work to untested young lawyers. Why take the risk when they can go to a more experienced person?

However, when you do pro bono work, those who cannot afford a lawyer or have no hope of getting any relief for some reason will entrust you with their work, because what do they stand to lose anyway?

For example, when people are in desperate need of bail, they approach senior and experienced lawyers. There is very little chance that a young lawyer will get to argue bail matters. How then, are you going to make your name as a good criminal defence lawyer?

You may go to jail and find inmates who have not got bail for a long time, and do not even hope to get it. Maybe they have given up or their family has run out of money. This is your opportunity to take up such matters for free and then you will get to work on these cases and argue before judges, make an impression and get the experience of regularly appearing before these judges.

Very soon, you will begin to get success. When that happens, the inmates who are going out of the jail will tell everyone about how there is a great benevolent lawyer who helped them to secure bail. All those people may approach you after that for assistance, primarily for two reasons: you have proof of success, which makes others in need of legal service trust you, and the second is that you appear to be a good person who genuinely cares about people because you do pro bono work.

People are terrified to trust lawyers, but if they come to know someone does pro bono work regularly, they trust such a person very easily as you have established that you are not a cutthroat lawyer who only cares about money. 

https://lawsikho.com/course/diploma-advanced-contract-drafting-negotiation-dispute-resolution

Click Above

Taking up pro bono work provides these early opportunities for substantial and meaningful direct interaction with clients who are in dire need of help and can’t afford it. Those clients will refer you to many others in the near future. Each person you help will become an ambassador for you. 

#3 Pro bono education for your future clients builds a pipeline

Educating your potential clients is also a form of pro bono work that has great potential. For example, if you want to work on wildlife matters or environmental, is it possible to interact with forest officials and educate them on how to prosecute those who violate wildlife laws? If they all have learned important lessons on prosecution from you, how much is the possibility that they might recommend you for prosecuting those matters to their respective departments? What is the possibility that they may influence those who need a lawyer to come to you?

It is the same in every area of law. Many law firms have their blogs or youtube channels for the same reason. Law firm partners even pay money to go and speak in industry events where they get a chance to educate their potential clients. 

Educating your clients is one of the most important marketing strategies for lawyers, and do not miss out on it!

Social Pro bono work vis-a-vis business-related pro bono work?

It is not necessary that only those who deal with issues of individual or society can do pro bono work. It is equally important and relevant for business lawyers.

You can start by helping small startups and rookie founders who cannot afford a lawyer yet, or you can give legal support to an industry association in matters that affect their members or constituents.

How to strategize your Pro bono projects?

1. Take 1-2 cases a week or month depending on your schedule

You might have just started your independent practice, or working under some senior. In all these scenarios, try to analyze how much time you can actually spend on going pro bono. Take up cases that suit your time schedules, because if you’re not able to do justice to these cases, it can lead to bad publicity as well.

2. Do not overstretch yourself, draw clear boundaries about how much time you will spend on pro bono

Doing pro bono work is important for your practice, but it is also important to not let it hamper your regular work. Treat pro bono work only during specific hours of the day and also do more such pro bono work that helps to build your practice. Many people make the mistake of taking up too many pro bono matters in an unsustainable manner. Do not overstretch yourself. 

3. Find a void in the market and work on issues relevant to it

It is very important to go beyond the normal in understanding problems in your area of specialization. When you shortlist the area of practice you’re willing to work in, try to find a void in that specific area that requires urgent attention. This would eventually cater to your practice in the best way possible!

For example, we all know of Trust Legal as one of the best environmental law firms in the country, but a little known fact that in its initial years it undertook a plethora of pro bono seminars for environmental officers, training them the environmental laws. This is what made them solidify their presence in the market. 

4. Set up a helpline to assist and guide your target group/practice

It is not always possible for you as a lawyer to be able to invest physical presence, especially for pro bono matters. This does not mean you can not really do pro bono work. 

You can set up a helpline number wherein you can resolve the doubts and queries of your area of specialization. You can decide on planning out the time slots for the same as per your schedules, while also harnessing any deviation from your usual work life. For example, Lawsikho’s CEO, Ramanuj Mukherjee provided legal advice on various issues like sexual blackmail, salary dues, etc, via a helpline.

5. Offer training sessions to industrial bodies/associations 

Training sessions are the gamechangers for pro bono work. You are able to cater to a large audience, with similar interests and doubts together in one setting. Training sessions do not only help you in developing your skills but also improve your brand value in the market, which is the most important skill to survive and establish your practice for years to come. 

It is high time that lawyers, especially independent litigators, who want to make a mark in the practice realize that going pro bono does not lead to loss of billable hours.

While at the same time, it is also necessary to find the right time management for your practice and pursuing pro bono. 

Are you someone who would like to grow your law practice predictably, reliably and smoothly with more ideas like this? 

It is absolutely possible by applying sound principles of management and building systems with purpose and clarity. Go check out Certificate Course in Legal Practice Development and Management. 

Also, check out our other courses that close on 14th January- 

DIPLOMA

Diploma in Advanced Contract Drafting, Negotiation and Dispute Resolution

Diploma in Cyber Law, Fintech Regulations and Technology Contracts

Diploma in M&A, Institutional Finance and Investment Laws (PE and VC transactions)

Diploma in Intellectual Property, Media and Entertainment Laws

EXECUTIVE CERTIFICATE COURSES

Certificate Course in Capital Markets, Securities Laws, Insider Trading and SEBI Litigation

Certificate Course in Prevention of Sexual Harassment at the Workplace

Certificate Course in Labour, Employment and Industrial Laws for HR Managers

Certificate Course in Advanced Criminal Litigation & Trial Advocacy

Certificate Course in Real Estate Laws

Certificate Course in Media and Entertainment Law: Contracts, Licensing and Regulations

Certificate Course in Legal Practice Development and Management


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post How taking up pro bono work makes a difference in your career as a lawyer appeared first on iPleaders.

Execution of a Decree under Code of Civil Procedure, 1908

$
0
0

This article has been written by Kavita Chandra, a student of Vivekananda Institute Of Professional Studies, affiliated to Guru Gobind Singh Indraprastha University, Delhi. She has discussed the provisions relating to the execution of a decree under the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908.

Introduction

The litigation consists of three stages, initiation of litigation, adjudication of litigation, and implementation of litigation. The last stage of litigation, that is the implementation of litigation is known as an execution. Once a decree or judgment is passed by the court, it is the obligation of the person against whom the judgment is passed (judgment-debtor), to give effect to the decree so as to enable the decree-holder to enjoy the benefits of the judgment.

By execution, a judgment-debtor is compelled to carry out the mandate of the decree or order. Execution implies giving effect to an order or judgment of a court of justice. When the decree-holder gets the thing granted to him by judgment, decree or order, the execution is complete. 

Meaning, Nature and Scope

The term “execution” is not defined in the CPC. The term “execution” means implementing or enforcing or giving effect to an order or a  judgment passed by the court of justice. In simple words “execution” means the process of enforcing or giving effect to the decree or judgment of the court, by compelling the judgment-debtor to carry out the mandate of the decree or order and enable the decree-holder to recover the thing granted to him by judgment. 

Illustration:

X files a suit against Y for Rs 20,000 and obtains a decree against him. Here X would be called the decree-holder,  Y is the judgment-debtor, and the amount of Rs 20,000 is the judgment- debt. Y is bound to pay Rs 20,000 to X, as the decree is passed against him. Suppose Y refuses to pay the decretal amount to X, X can recover the said amount by execution through the judicial process. The principles governing the execution of a decree or order are given in Section 36 to Section 74 (substantive law) and Order 21 of the code which provides for procedural law.  

https://lawsikho.com/course/certificate-course-in-advanced-civil-litigation-practice-procedure-and-drafting

Click Here

Execution proceedings under CrPC

In Ghan Shyam Das v. Anant Kumar Sinha, the Supreme Court dealt with the provisions of the code relating to the execution of orders and decree and stated that the Code contains elaborate provisions which deal with all questions regarding executability of a decree in all aspects. 

The Court further observed that numerous provisions of Order 21 take care of various situations providing effective remedies to judgment-debtors, decree-holders and claimant objectors. In the cases, where provisions are not capable of giving relief inadequate measures and appropriate time, to an aggrieved party, then filing a regular suit in the civil court is the solution.

The Court further explained that the judicial quality of the remedy under Civil Procedure Code is considered to be superior as compared to other statutes therefore, the judges are expected to do better as they are entrusted with the administration of justice

Courts which can execute decrees

Section 38 of the Code states that a decree can be executed either by the Court of the first instance or by the Court to which it has been sent for execution.

Section 37 of the Code further establishes the scope of the expression “court which passed a decree” with the object of enabling a decree-holder to recover the fruits of the decree. The courts which fall within the said expression are as follows:

  1. The court of the first instance;
  2. The court which actually passed the decree in case of appellate decrees;
  3. The court which has jurisdiction to try the suit at the time of execution, if the court of first instance ceased to exist;
  4. The court which at the time of execution had jurisdiction to try the suit, if the court of first instance has ceased to have jurisdiction to execute the decree.

Explanation to the section clarifies that the court of first instance shall have jurisdiction to execute a decree even in the case of any area being transferred from the jurisdiction of the court of first instance to the jurisdiction of any other court. In such cases, the court to the jurisdiction of which such area has been transferred will also have jurisdiction to execute the decree, provided that the said court had jurisdiction to try the said suit when the application for execution was made.

Transfer of decree for execution

Section 39 provides that when a decree-holder makes an application to the court of the first instance to send the decree for execution to another court, the court of first instance may do the same if any of the following grounds exist:

  1. if the judgment-debtor carries on business, or resides or personally works for gain, within the jurisdiction of such Court;
  2. if the property of judgment-debtor does not come under the jurisdiction of the Court of the first instance but it comes under the local limits of the jurisdiction of such Court;
  3. if the decree directs delivery or sale of immovable property situated outside the jurisdiction of the Court which passed the same;
  4. if the Court which had passed the decree considers that the decree should be executed by another court, but it shall record the reasons in writing for doing the same.

Section 39(2) states that the Court of the first instance may suo motu send it for execution to any subordinate Court of competent jurisdiction.

The Section further states that if the execution of the decree is against a person or property outside the territorial jurisdiction of the court passing the decree, then such Court has no power to execute the decree.

In Mahadeo Prasad Singh v. Ram Lochan, the Supreme court held that the provisions of Section 39 are not mandatory because the court will have discretion in the matter which can be exercised by it, judicially. The decree-holder would not have any vested or substantive right to get the decree transferred to another court.

Execution of foreign decrees in India

The Code lays down the procedure for execution of foreign judgments and decrees in India. While enforcing a foreign judgment or decree in India it should be ensured that the judgment or decree is a conclusive one, given on the merits of the case and by a court having competent jurisdiction.

What is a foreign judgment and a foreign decree?

Section 2 (6) of the CPC defines a foreign judgment as a judgment of a foreign court. As per section 2(5) of CPC, a foreign court implies a court which is situated outside India and which is not established or continued by the authority of the Central Government.

A foreign decree is defined in Explanation II to section 44A of the CPC as a decree or judgment of such court and which directs that a sum of money is payable. However, such sum of money shall not be a sum payable in respect of taxes or other charges of a like nature or in respect of any penalty or fine. It should not include an arbitral award, even if such an award is enforceable as a decree or judgment.

Foreign judgment or decree needs to be conclusive

A foreign decree or judgment needs to be conclusive in nature. Section 13 of the CPC lays down the test for conclusiveness of a foreign judgment or decree, which says that a foreign judgment would be conclusive in all cases except the following :

  • When a court of competent jurisdiction has not pronounced it;
  • When it has not been pronounced on the merits of the case;
  • When it has been based on a wrong view of international law or a refusal to recognize the law of India in cases in which such law is applicable;
  • When the proceedings carried out while obtaining the judgment are opposed to natural justice;
  • When such judgment has been obtained by fraud;
  • When it sustains a claim that had been based on a breach of any law in force in India.

Thus, a foreign judgement or decree shall pass the seven tests mentioned above. Otherwise, such foreign judgment or decree cannot be enforced in India as such judgment or decree will not be regarded as conclusive if it fails any of these tests.

Mode of enforcement of a foreign judgment or decree

Two ways in which a decree or foreign judgment can be enforced in India are as follows:

  • Where the decree or judgment has been given by a court in a reciprocating territory;
  • Where decree or judgment has been given by a court in a non-reciprocating territory.

1. Execution of foreign decree of a reciprocating territory in India

According to Section 44A of the CPC, a decree of any superior court of a reciprocating territory shall be executed in India as that has been passed by the district court.

Reciprocating territory signifies, any territory or country outside India which the Central Government has declared to be a reciprocating territory, by notification in the Official Gazette, and superior courts, with reference to any reciprocating territory, means such courts that would be specified in the said notification.

Therefore, a judgment which has been pronounced by a court of a reciprocating territory can be enforced in India as an Indian decree by filing an execution application. A certified copy of a decree of any superior court of a reciprocating territory should be filed in a District Court, once this is done, the decree shall be executed as if it had been passed by the District Court of India and the provisions governing execution which are laid down in Order 21 of the CPC will be applicable to the decree.

While filing the execution application the original certified copy of the decree shall be filed along with a certificate from the superior court stating the extent to which the decree has been satisfied or adjusted.

2. Execution in case of decrees from non-reciprocating territories

In the cases where a judgment or decree has not been pronounced by a court of a reciprocating territory, it can be executed only when a fresh suit on that foreign judgment is filed in a court of  India which has competent jurisdiction to entertain the same.

The Bombay High Court, in Marine Geotechnics LLC vs. Coastal Marine Construction & Engineering Ltd., observed that when a decree has been pronounced by a court of a non-reciprocating foreign territory, it can not be executed unless a fresh suit has been filed by the decree-holder on that foreign decree or on the original cause of action, or both. The suit must be filed within a period of three years from the date of the judgment or decree. The person seeking execution shall show that the foreign decree passes the tests of Section 13. 

The court further observed that Section 13 of the Code provides substantive law and Section 44A of the Code is an enabling provision and it enables a decree-holder to put a decree obtained from a court of a reciprocating territory into execution. Section 13 clearly expresses the principles of private international law, that a court will not enforce a foreign judgment of a competent court. 

Execution of Indian decrees in a foreign territory

Section 45 of the Code is related to the execution of decrees outside the territory of India. It states that a Court has the power to send a decree for execution to a Court outside India which has been established by the Central Government’s authority. It should be ensured that the State has, by notification in the Official Gazette, declared the said section can apply to such Court. A plain reading of the aforesaid  provision yields the following features:

  1. The decree which has to be executed should be of an Indian Court and it should be for execution in a foreign territory.
  2. The Central Government should have established the transferee court in such foreign territory.
  3. The State Government should have declared by notification in the Official Gazette that this section will apply to the said foreign Court.

The provision, therefore, prescribes the prerequisite conditions for the execution of an Indian decree outside the country. Therefore, in the absence of either of the aforesaid conditions in Section 45, an Indian Court has no jurisdiction to send its decree for execution to a Court not situated in India.

Execution of decree at more than one place

There is no provision in the Code which prevents a decree-holder from executing a decree simultaneously at more than one place against the property of the judgment-debtor.

In Prem Lata Agarwal vs Lakshman Prasad Gupta & Ors, Supreme Court observed that “simultaneous execution proceeding in more than one place is possible but the power shall be used in a restricted manner, in exceptional cases by imposing proper terms so that the judgment debtors do not face any hardship because of several executions are being allowed to be proceeded with at the same time.” Therefore, simultaneous execution proceedings are not without jurisdiction or illegal. 

Moreover, as per Section 39 of the Code, simultaneous execution of a decree is permissive in nature as it provides for execution of a decree either by the Court of first instance or by the Court to which it is sent for execution. 

Procedure in execution

Section 51 to 54 of the Code talks about the procedure in execution.

Section 51

The section states the jurisdiction and power of the court in executing a decree. An application for execution of the decree can either be oral or written. The court may execute decree as per the mode of implementation prayed by the decree-holder or as the court deems fit.

Mode of executing decree

  • By delivery of any property (movable or immovable) specifically decreed. 
  • By sale of the property with or without the attachment of the property. If the property is situated within the jurisdiction of the court then it has the power to attach the property.
  • By arrest and detention. However, this mode should not be exercised without giving a reasonable opportunity to the judgment-debtor, in the form of a show-cause notice as to why he should not be imprisoned. 
  • Execution by appointing a receiver
  • If any other mode apart from the ones mentioned in clause(a) to (c) needs to be used in the execution of a decree then clause(e) comes into play.

Section 52

This section deals with the cases where the decree is passed against the legal representative of the judgment-debtor (deceased). So long as the property of the deceased remains in the hands of a legal representative, a decree can be executed against the property, if it is for the payment of money out of the property of the deceased and if the decree has been passed against the party as the legal representative of the deceased person.

In a situation where the property which is in the possession of the judgement-debtor came in the hands of the legal representative and it has not been duly applied by him, the court will enforce the execution of the decree against him as if the decree was to the extent passed against him personally.

Section 53

The Section states that when a property is liable for payment of a debt of a deceased ancestor and it is in the hands of a son and descendant, then the property will be deemed to be of the deceased which has as his legal representative come into the hands of the son or other descendants.

Section 54

When a decree has been passed for partition or for the separate possession of a share of an undivided estate for the payment of revenue to the government, this section comes into play. The partition of the estate or share needs to be made by the collector,  but if the collector denies making the partition of the revenue paying property, then the civil court can do so. To attract the provisions of this section, the plaintiff asking for the division of government revenue is not deemed as an essential condition.

Powers of the transferor court

Once a court which has passed a decree and transferred it to another court of competent jurisdiction, it would cease to have jurisdiction over that decree and it cannot execute the decree. Then, only the transferee court can entertain an application for execution.

Powers of the transferee court

Under Order 21 Rule 8 of the Code, if a decree under the provisions of section 39 has been sent for execution to another district, it may be executed by either the district court to which it was sent or by a subordinate court which has competent jurisdiction, to which the district court may refer it.

Section 42 provides for the powers of the transferee court and states that the Court to which a decree has been sent for execution shall have the same powers in execution of such decree as if it had been passed by itself.

The Court has the power to punish the persons who cause obstructions in the execution of the decree and the power shall be exercised by the court as if the decree has been passed by it. The main object of giving such powers to the transferee court is to ensure that the judgment-debtor pays the money or gives such other thing to the decree-holder as would be directed by the decree.

The Court will have the following powers, namely:—

  • To send the decree for execution to another Court under section 39.
  • To enforce execution of a decree against the legal representative of the deceased judgment-debtor under section 50.
  • To order attachment of a decree.

However, the court to which a decree is sent for execution will not have the power to order execution at the instance of the transferee of the decree and the power to grant leave to execute a decree passed against a firm against any person, other than a person referred to in Rule 50 of Order XXI.

Powers of executing court

The section states the jurisdiction and power of the court in executing a decree. An application for execution of the decree can either be oral or written. The court may execute decree as per the mode of implementation prayed by the decree-holder or as the court deems fit.

Mode of executing a decree

  • By delivery of any property (movable or immovable) specifically decreed. 
  • By sale of the property with or without the attachment of the property. If the property is situated within the jurisdiction of the court then it has the power to attach the property.
  • By arrest and detention. However, this mode should not be exercised without giving a reasonable opportunity to the judgment-debtor, in the form of a show-cause notice as to why he should not be imprisoned. 
  • Execution by appointing a receiver.
  • If any other mode apart from the ones mentioned in clause(a) to (c) needs to be used in the execution of a decree then clause(e) comes into play.

Conclusion

It clearly appears from the above discussion, that execution means implementing or enforcing or giving effect to an order or a  judgment passed by the court of justice. The provisions contained in Order 21 covers different types of situation and provide effective remedies to the judgment-debtors, claimant objectors and third parties apart from the decree-holder.

The Code takes care of the rights of judgment-debtors too. Various modes of execution of a decree are also provided by the Code which includes arrest, detention of the judgment-debtor, delivery of possession, attachment of the property, by sale, partition, the appointment of receiver and payment of money etc. Thus, the provisions are rendered effective or capable of giving relief to an aggrieved party.


To know more about Mergers & Acquisitions in India, Please Click Here.


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content. 

The post Execution of a Decree under Code of Civil Procedure, 1908 appeared first on iPleaders.

Fundamental Duties: Article 51-A Under Indian Constitution

$
0
0

Indian This article is written by Aniket Tiwari, a 1st-year student at Law School, Banaras Hindu University. This article gives detailed information about the Fundamental Duties in a very interesting way.  

Introduction 

Our country India has the lengthiest written constitution in the world. In this, the rights of every person are kept in mind. However, the three organs of the State cannot make this country self-reliant until they get the proper support from the citizens as well. So there are certain fundamental duties which are expected from the citizens to be carried out. In this article, we will discuss the Fundamental Duties which are expected to be carried out by the citizens of our country. It is a moral obligation on the citizens to maintain the feeling of patriotism and unity among all the citizens of the country.

I remember an instance where a popular celebrity was found to breach the fundamental duty. There was a lady wearing a saree during the commentary of the live cricket match and that saree had a reflection of tricolor in it. In this case, the Indian flag seemed to touch the feet of that anchor. She was brutally criticized by various peoples and in the court, as this was a case of breach of fundamental duty so no legal action can be further taken against that anchor. 

This was an instance of the year 2007 when I was still a child and knowing nothing about the Fundamental Duties. However, today I can clearly say that it was a breach of fundamental duty. Fundamental Duties are applied only to the citizens of the country, not to any organ of the state.

Need for Fundamental Duties

It is important to understand that no democratic system could ever succeed if the citizens are not willing to participate actively by discharging their duties which are expected to be done by them. 

Our Constitution has provided us with various rights and expects us to perform certain duties as a return. Article 51(A) talks about these Fundamental Duties and has 11 fundamental duties that are expected to be performed by the citizens (there were 10 earlier and 11th was added later by the 86th amendment). First, we will discuss these 11 fundamental duties and then we can move on to the next topic whether it is needed or not.

  • We need to follow our Constitution and should respect our national flag and national anthem.
  • Should follow the ideals of the freedom struggle.
  • Protect the sovereignty and integrity of our nation.
  • Protect our nation and provide national services when required.
  • Should have the spirit of a common brotherhood.
  • Preserve the culture of our country.
  • Protect the environment of our country.
  • Generate scientific rationale for every thought.
  • To protect public property.
  • Strive for excellence.
  • It is the duty of every parent to send their children between 6-14 years to school.    

From these fundamental duties, one can easily understand the need for the fundamental duty in our constitution. It is required to protect the sovereignty of our nation. To maintain the unity and integrity of our nation. Rights and duties go hand in hand and cannot be separated at any cost. Fundamental duties and fundamental rights are two sides of a coin which we know that it can’t be separated. Also, it is found as the need of the hour to introduce fundamental duties in our constitution.

  • Maintain the Sovereign Nature of State: The main aim of the insertion of fundamental duties was to maintain the sovereign nature of our state. Although these are not legally enforced then also provide some kind of sovereign power to our state.
  • To maintain Unity and Integrity of the nation: In the current scenario, we can see that people are often talking about the term “intolerance”. They are relating intolerance with unity. According to them if the people become intolerant then the compatibility with other people will be affected and ultimately the unity among different people will be affected terribly. Our Fundamental Duties help in developing tolerance among the citizens and ultimately help in developing the feeling of unity and integrity among the citizens of our country.
  • In the interpretation of different statues which are made by the legislature: The Fundamental Duties help in the interpretation of the law/ statues made by the legislature. It is held in many cases that the need for Fundamental Duties in interpreting the Fundamental Right is pivotal. In the case of Mohan Kumar Singhania v. Union of India the court held that statues made according to Article 51(A) of our Constitution are valid. Thus from this, we can clearly see that Fundamental Duties help in interpreting the constitutional provision.
  • In order to create a balance between the claims of the individual citizen and those of the civil society: A report was submitted by a committee led by late Justice J.S. Verma in the year 1999. The need for and importance of Fundamental Duties(especially under Article 51A) was explained by this committee. It can be found in recommendation nos 3.38.1 and 3.38.2 of the report. According to this committee, it is important to create a balance between the expectations of individual citizens and to create a civil society. To achieve this goal, it becomes important to orient the citizens of our country to be aware of their social and citizenship responsibility. And by doing this we will ultimately end up by shaping the civil society(By term ‘civil society’, we mean that a society where all become concerned and considerate of the rights of fellow citizens).
  • Needed for the current situation: When our Constitution was drafted by our Constitution makers they found that they didn’t need to insert the fundamental duty in our constitution. But as time passes the need and importance of Fundamental Duty was felt that is why they were inserted later by 42nd Amendment in our Constitution. Earlier the feeling of patriotism, harmony, feeling to promote brotherhood, secularism were inherent and there was no need to put any moral or legal obligation on the citizen to the same. The feeling of serving the country and defending the country at any cost was there among the citizens of the country. The people were willing to protect the rich heritage of Indian culture.

However, as time passed people were lacking these qualities. Earlier the above qualities were taught by the family and also by the teachers in school and colleges. But with the passage of time, all the people become so busy in their life that they forget to inculcate these values among themselves. Those qualities which were once an integral part of the life of the citizens of India were found to be enforced in the form of Fundamental Duties.         

In Chandra Bhavan Boarding And Lodging Bangalore v. State of Mysore And Another, the Supreme Court held that it is not possible for our constitution to protect all the rights of citizens without assigning certain duties to its citizens. However, this decision was taken before the insertion of fundamental duties in the Indian Constitution. It clearly explains the need for fundamental duties for making a welfare society.

Source of Fundamental Duties

Nowadays we can clearly see that people will start protesting and how often it becomes violent. There are many instances where any protest became violent and people start vandalizing public property and start disrespecting the government. Here citizens go beyond the line and often forget their moral duty towards the nation. There was a similar condition in our country during the National Emergency of 1976 where the then ruling party of our country i.e. Indian National Congress formed the Sardar Swaran Singh Committee. 

The main purpose of this committee was to suggest the amendment in the Constitution of India(mainly for the recommendations of fundamental duties). This committee suggested that the citizens should know that for the enjoyment of their rights they also have some duties and they should be abided by those duties. This committee recommended 8 points of fundamental duties. These were as follows:

  1. To respect the constitution of our country.
  2. To uphold the sovereignty and maintain unity and integrity of the nation.
  3. To respect the democratic institutions.
  4. To protect our country and provide national services when asked to do so.
  5. Affirm communalism in any form.
  6. To promote the common good of people and cooperate in the implementation of the Directive Principle of State Policy. 
  7. To safeguard public property.
  8. Pay taxes according to rules and regulations.

However, all of the recommendations were not accepted and some further changes were made to the recommendations of the Swaran Singh Committee and Fundamental Duties were finally inserted by the 42nd amendment in the Indian Constitution in the year 1976. However, initially, there were only ten fundamental duties and the 11th duty was added later by the 86th amendment in 2002.

Many countries in this world have the fundamental duty mentioned in their constitution. For example, Articles 43-45 of the Democratic Republic of Vietnam talks about the duties of citizens towards the nation. Similarly, Article 194 of The Netherlands also mentions about the same. Japan has also mentioned the fundamental duty of the residents of the country. The idea of Fundamental Duties which has been mentioned in our constitution is basically taken from the constitution of Russia( then USSR). These fundamental duties are mentioned in Chapter 10 of the Constitution of the USSR. The concept of Fundamental Duties have also been discussed in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and also in the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights.      

Enforcement of Duties

Directive Principle of State Policy (which is given in Chapter IV of the Indian Constitution) and Fundamental Duties needs to be read together. Both have a moral obligation on the state and citizens respectively.

Fundamental Duties do not have any legal devour for its violation. There are six positive duties which are expected to be done by the citizens of our country and there are five negative duties which are not expected to be carried out by the citizens. There is no legal enforceability for its breach, it is because of the nature of the Fundamental Duties. We can clearly understand that it is practically impossible to enforce these duties.

It is important to know that Fundamental Duties are only enforceable for the citizens holding public offices. It is possible by way of departmental rules of conduct and by making suitable legislation. There are appropriate sanctions for the breach of Fundamental Duties in Public Offices.

There are many places in India where a person holding public office can be barred from departmental promotions, also their increment can be refused. An officer who takes part in strikes and organized a rally against the institution can be made to give up his salary for that day.

Section 3 of the Prevention of Insults to National Honour Act, 1971

Prevention of Insults to National Honour Act, 1971 is an act that prevents the citizens of our country from dishonoring the country. It includes dishonoring the National Flag and Constitution of India. However, these are reasonably enforceable.

Section 3 of this act talks about the prevention of singing of the National Anthem. All the citizens should be punished if they intentionally prevent the singing of the National Anthem or causes disturbance to an assembly which is busy in such singing. For instance, if a person starts making noise in a place where an assembly is doing the National Anthem he would be punished under this article.

In the recent case of Shyam Narayan Chouksey v. Union of India in which Hon’ble Justice Deepak Misra and Hon’ble Justice Roy passed an interim order making it mandatory to:

  1. i) Play the National Anthem before the screening of each movie.
  2. ii) Making it compulsory for all viewers to stand still during the National Anthem.

This judgment was found to be violating Article 19(1) of the Indian Constitution as the unreasonable restrictions were put on the citizens of the country. Article 19(1)g clearly mentioned that the state can formulate any law which puts a restriction on Article 19(1) however these restrictions should be reasonable. The decision, in this case, was found to be violating the fundamental right of citizens. It was found to be violating the Fundamental Rights as it put unreasonable restrictions that cannot be done by the State. As our country is a liberal country where everyone has the right to think independently, express their views without any obligation and follow their belief without any compulsion.

This case brought turmoil in the Indian society as many people supported this verdict as they found it to protect the honor of our nation. There were also people who were not satisfied with the verdict of the Court as they find it to violate the fundamental rights of citizens. It was a landmark case in the Indian Judicial System. How can one be compelled to stand during the National Anthem without his will? Also, how can the patriotism of a person be judged by this? Here, in this case, the Supreme Court clearly held that the Fundamental Duties are above Fundamental Rights. Here there were many loopholes in the Supreme Court decision.

https://lawsikho.com/course/certificate-course-in-advanced-civil-litigation-practice-procedure-and-drafting
       Click above

M.C. Mehta v. Union of India, 1988 SCR (2) 530

The Fundamental Duty, given in Article 51 A(g) of the Indian Constitution clearly mentions the duty of the citizen to protect the environment. According to this article, it is the duty of every citizen to protect and preserve the natural environment (natural environment includes forest, rivers, lakes, and wildlife). A healthy environment is an essential element of the welfare of any society.

In the case of M.C. Mehta v. Union of India Article 51(g) was enforced by the Supreme Court. In this case, 274.50 million liters of sewage water was being discharged into the river Ganga on a daily basis. This case is about the city of Kanpur, which is the biggest city on the bank of river Ganga. Here water pollution was to a great extent that’s why the petitioner filed a petition in the Supreme Court. Here Apex Court of the country found that Municipal bodies and industries in Kanpur were the main reason for polluting the river. Therefore judgment was taken against Kanpur Nagar Mahapalika. In this case, Nagar Mahapalika and Municipal Boards were held liable because it is their responsibility to maintain and protect the environment in the areas of Kanpur.

Further here the Apex Court held that as there are many grave consequences of water and air pollution and also as there is a need to protect and improve the natural environment it became a moral obligation on the part of the government to ensure the protection of the environment. Also, it is one of the fundamental duties which is given in our constitution which makes a moral obligation on the part of the citizens as well to ensure the protection of the environment. The Supreme Court held that it is the duty of the Central Government to direct all the educational institutions of our country to teach and train citizens about the protection and improvement of the environment for at least one hour a week.

Further Supreme Court held that the Central Government needs to get the textbook written for the same purpose. These textbooks would be further distributed among all educational institutions of our country. There should be training for teachers who are going to give such educational teaching to children. 

Fundamental Duties: An Aid to the interpretation of Constitutional provisions

By reading all the Fundamental Rights and Fundamental Duties together we can make a clear understanding that there is a direct relationship between the Fundamental Rights and Fundamental Duties. They are connected in some or other way. It often becomes difficult for one to relate to them. But if we read it together the task becomes much easier. For example, Article 21(A) is similar to Article 51 A (k). Both of these articles talk about the education of the child between 6- 14 years. While Article 21(A) put the obligation on the state to see that no one is deprived of the Right to Education on the other hand Article 51 A (k) makes the duty of the citizen to make sure that no children are deprived of going to school. Thus here ultimate aim of the constitutional provision under Article 21(A) of providing education to children is achieved by this Fundamental Duty (Article 51A (k)). Thus here by this illustration, we can clearly understand that Fundamental Duties helps in the interpretation of any constitutional provision.

We can’t deny the importance of Fundamental Duties simply as they are not enforceable in a Court of Law. Take Another instance, Article 21 which talks about the “Right to Life and Personal Liberty” is achieved by Article 51A (g) which is a Fundamental Duty. Right to Life and Personal Liberty include the Right to a Healthy Environment. It is (Article 21) explained by the Supreme Court in a positive way and the Supreme Court regarded that “Right to Life” means “Right to Clean Environment”. Also talking about Article 51 A(g), it makes the duty of the citizen to protect and improve the natural environment. Thus here also we can see that the right of the citizen to get a healthy environment is ultimately achieved by making it the Fundamental Duty of the citizen to protect it.

AIIMS Students Union v. AIIMS, AIR 2001 SC 3262

In the case of AIIMS Student Union v. AIIMS, there was a test of merit (based on marks) over reservation in the admission process for postgraduate medical courses of the All India Institute of Medical Sciences.

In this case, three meritorious students went to Delhi High Court by filing a writ petition for the purpose of getting admission in the prestigious institute of medical science. Here there was a reservation of 33% of seats to those who have graduated from this institute itself. The issue raised was whether AIIMS has the right to give such a reservation to the students. Here the Supreme Court found it unreasonable to reserve a seat for the college student itself and quash such acts of the AIIMS as it was against the constitution.

Here the Supreme Court clearly held that though the Fundamental Duties though may not be enforceable by a writ of the Court they provide a valuable guide in the interpretation of the constitutional provision. Here, in this case, the State (which includes citizens of our country failed) to take care of fundamental duty i.e. to strive towards excellence of individuals and collective activity in order for the betterment of the nation. The Fundamental Duties do not expressly cast any duty on the State, the duty of each individual became the collective duty of the State.

Aruna Roy v. Union of India, AIR 2002 SC 3176

In the very famous case of Aruna Roy v. Union of India PIL was filed in the Supreme Court. It has been contended that the National Curriculum Framework for School Education (NCFSE) which was published by NCERT is against the constitutional mandate, anti-secular and without consultation with Central Advisory Board of Education (CABE) and therefore it needed to be quashed. The implementation of NCFSE was challenged as it did not get the approval of CABE.  Also, NCFSE was found to be against the constitution as it violated the basic principle of secularism.

However, the petition was canceled as the Supreme Court did not find any reason to cancel the framework (NCFSE). What is given in our constitution is that students should be taught that every religion is common/ equal? Further Article 51A (e) clearly explains this condition. According to this fundamental duty, it is the duty of the citizen to promote harmony and brotherhood among the people of a different religion. And in order to achieve these universal values like truth, right conduct, love, and peace should be the base of education. 

The state of Gujarat v. Mirzapur Moti Kureshi Kassab Jamat, AIR 2006 SC 212

Nowadays one of the most rising issues which are often in the news is about the cow slaughtering. The case of the State of Gujarat v Mirzapur Moti Kureshi Kassab Jamat clearly explains all the aspects of cow slaughtering. The petition was filed challenging the amendments made in the Bombay Animal Preservation and that amendment was applicable to the state of Gujarat. The amendment puts a complete ban on the slaughter of bulls and bullocks. The petition challenged that as the cows and bullocks above 16 years do not possess any economical benefit so they can be slaughtered by those who are willing to do it.

However, the Apex Court held that the economy of Gujarat is still dependent on agriculture. In agriculture processes, these animals are of great importance. It, therefore, becomes important for the preservation and protection of these animals. They can be used for the purpose of creating biogas after they have become old.

The Supreme Court also held that the amendments do not violate Article 14 and Article 19 of our Constitution as this amendment put a reasonable restriction on these rights of the citizen.

Also, the Supreme Court held that according to Article 51 A (g) which puts a duty on the citizen to protect and improve the environment and here environment including forests, lakes, rivers, and wildlife. So the court held that according to this Article of our constitution the state can make laws for the protection of the environment. This Article helps in the interpretation of Article 21 of our constitution according to which as mentioned earlier in this article talks about the Right to Clean Environment.

Government of India v. George Philip, AIR 2007 SC 705

In this very famous case of Government of India v. George Philip, the purpose of compulsory retirement was challenged by the respondent. The respondent who was working in BARC was granted two years left at the starting of his service by the department. It was given to him to carry out advanced research training. After many reminders, the petitioner overstayed in the foreign and an inquiry was constituted for the same purpose and charge against him was proven. He was allowed (decision of the High Court) to join his service but no wages were decided to be given to him for those days which he was not able to attend the service. But the Supreme Court overruled this decision of the High Court. The reasoning given by the Supreme Court behind its decision was that the earlier decision i.e. the decision of the High Court was against Article 51A(j).

Article 51A(j) clearly says that it is the duty of one to always strive towards excellence in all spheres of life of an individual and it also talks about the collective activity so that the nation keeps rising higher in an endeavor and this can not be achieved until the employees maintain the discipline.

Conclusion

At last, we can conclude that in this article we have come to know about every aspect of Fundamental Duties and by reading every aspect of it we can clearly understand the need and importance of Fundamental Duty. It was added in our constitution as our government realized that a civil society (discussed earlier in this article) can not be made by the state only. The citizens of our country need to play a vital role in achieving the basic aim of our constitution. They can do this by following their duties towards the nation as mentioned in Article 51A of our Constitution.

Also one can not ask for a right if one is not doing the duty assigned to them.

References

  1. SCC Online.
  2. D.D. Basu -” Constitution of India”
  3. https://kjablr.kar.nic.in/sites/kjablr.kar.nic.in/files/05.%20Fundamental%20Duties.pdf
  4. https://blog.ipleaders.in/national-anthem-shyam-narayan-chouksey-case/

Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content. 

The post Fundamental Duties: Article 51-A Under Indian Constitution appeared first on iPleaders.

The Parliament of India Under Indian Constitution

$
0
0

This article is written by Dhruv Vatsyayan. He is a student of Law School, Banaras Hindu University and currently pursuing his 1st year of B.A.LL.B.(Hons.). In this article, he discusses the Union Legislature, i.e the Parliament.

Introduction 

Parliament, which is a platform to do a discussion on issues having social and civic importance in any popular democracy, is a cornerstone of democratic values in any representative democracy.

Parliament may be perceived as a political institution to ensure the realization of what Mahatma Gandhi once envisaged that, Democracy essentially is the art and science of mobilizing and utilizing the entire physical, economic and immaterial & metaphysical resources for the common good of all the people.

Though the origin of the concept of Parliament traces to European nations since medieval ages, it has been an indispensable part of the Indian democratic structure since the inception of democracy in India.

The stalwarts of Indian freedom struggle, legal experts and other members of the Constituent Assembly, arrived at a conclusion of endorsing a parliamentary system of government after an extensive and in-depth study of the Constitution of other nation-states.

After the first general election in the year 1952, both the houses of parliament came into existence.

It must be noted that after the Constitution was adopted and till general elections, i.e between 1950 to 1952, the Constituent Assembly itself functioned as the provisional legislative body.

Composition of Parliament

The Parliament in India comprises the President of India, the Upper House i.e. Rajya Sabha and the Lower House i.e. Lok Sabha. 

Hindi names of both the houses, i.e. Rajya Sabha and Lok Sabha had been adopted by the Upper House and the Lower House respectively.

The Constitution describes the structure of parliament in Article 79. It states that the Parliament comprises of the President and the two houses i.e. the Lower House or House of People and Upper house or Council of States.

To understand the functions served by the President, we can say that the post of president is somewhat equivalent to the role and functions of the Queen or Crown in the United Kingdom.

Even though the President is a part of the legislature, he doesn’t sit in parliament.

However, a bill passed by houses can’t be made law without the assent of the President.

Now, let’s discuss the Upper house or Rajya Sabha.

The Rajya Sabha

Rajya Sabha is the Upper House of the Indian Parliament.

This house is permanent in nature as it can never be dissolved. This is because every member elected to the Rajya Sabha serves for a term of 6 years and one-third of members do retire biennially, while the other members continue their tenure. It’s like an election in different batches.

Retired members are subject to re-election.

This house consists of 250 members out of which, 238 members are elected by means of a single transferable vote. 12 members are nominated by the President on the advice of the council of ministers.

The method of election of these members is listed in Article 80(1) of the Indian Constitution.

It says that the members would be elected by the elected members of respective state assemblies in accordance with proportionate representation of every state.

This provision thus reflects the federal nature of the Council of States, where every state is represented proportionally.

However, the number of members representing each state varies from 1 to as large as 31 (for Uttar Pradesh).

Article 84 of the Indian Constitution provides for the qualification to become a member of Rajya Sabha, i.e. one must have the nationality of India, doesn’t holds any office of profit and must have completed 30 years of age. Article 102 of the Indian Constitution provides for conditions on which one can be disqualified from either of the houses. It says that one must be disqualified as a member of the house if,

  • he/she holds any office of profit
  • he/she is of unsound mind
  • he/she is discharged insolvent
  • he/she is not a citizen of India and has voluntarily accepted the nationality of other nations.
  • he/she is disqualified under any law made by the Parliament

Chairperson and Deputy Chairperson of Rajya Sabha

In Rajya Sabha, the Vice-President of India presides of its sessions and is ex-officio chairperson of the house.

However, to take care of its day-to-day affairs, and to preside over the sessions in the absence of the Chairperson, i.e. the Vice-President, a member of the house itself is chosen internally by the Rajya Sabha as Deputy Chairperson of the house.

Position in other Countries

It’ll be an interesting task to look into other democratic systems if something like Rajya Sabha or Upper House exists there too.

Most of the nation-states in the European Union have a council of states. And almost all of them functions as a consultative or advisory body to the president or the government.

For example, the Belgian Council of States is a Judicial and advisory body, which assists legal advisory in matters of draft bills to the executive.

While in China, the Chinese State Council happens to be the highest administrative body of the country.

In Portugal, the Portuguese State Council serves as an advisory body of the President of the state.

In the United States, there is no such body resembling the functions that Rajya Sabha serves. However, it has a bicameral legislature and is comprised of House of Representatives and the Senate. Interestingly, the number of senators for each administrative unit is fixed, i.e. 2.

Let’s discuss the utility of Rajya Sabha and the need for the second house.

The utility of the Rajya Sabha

Regarding utility and need of a second chamber in the parliament, an extensive debate took place in the constituent assembly while framing of the constitution.

Ultimately, it was agreed to adopt a bicameral system of legislature and thus the Rajya Sabha was formed as the second chamber with a different method of election and different composition altogether.

The utility of the Rajya Sabha can be understood by this hypothetical situation. Suppose, after general elections, a single political party comes to a thumping majority in the lower house.

Now, having this majority, they can pass any bills or piece of legislation even if the same is not fruitful to the people and democracy unless there is a system of check.

So, this second house serves as a safety valve and a system of check regarding all the functions of the lower house.

The Lok Sabha

The provisions of Article 331 of the Indian Constitution provides for the existence of the house of the people and shall consist of a maximum of 530 chosen members from different states, not more than 20 members to be chosen from the Union Territories. If President feels that there is a lack of representation of the Anglo-Indian Community in parliament he may nominate two members of the Anglo-Indian Community.

Some seats are also reserved for the Scheduled Caste and Scheduled tribes communities especially laid aside for them all over the country.

The representation is allocated to the states and the Union Territories according to the Representation of the people Act passed by the Parliament of India in 1951.

The Lok Sabha, unless dissolved midway, continues its tenure for 5 years from the day of its first meeting.

Territorial Constituencies

As the members of the Lok Sabha are elected directly, it needs to have a proper division of the country into smaller units.

And for this purpose, India is divided into small territorial constituencies.

These constituencies are sorted out in such a way so that each Indian state has an adequate share of members in the house and is proportional to its population.

To keep this division democratic, the constituencies are carved out in such a way so that the ratio of the number of representatives and the population of that particular constituency should remain the same across all the constituencies. 

Tenure of Lok Sabha 

The members elected by Universal Adult Suffrage serve their offices for a tenure of five years.

However, if devoid of a popular majority, the government can fall and the house can dissolve midway anytime before the completion of five years.

Qualification for Membership of Parliament 

Qualifications necessary for becoming a member of parliament is provided in Article 84 of the Indian Constitution.

Following are the qualifications:

  • he/she should be a citizen of India.
  • In the case of Upper House,i.e. Rajya Sabha, he/she should have completed at least 30 years of age and for Lower House,i.e. Lok Sabha, he/she should have completed 25 years of age.
  • he/she need to comply with other such qualifications as prescribed in any law by the Indian Parliament.

Now. let us take a look into grounds on which one can be disqualified as a Member of Parliament.

Disqualification 

Now, Article 102 of the Indian Constitution lays the grounds on which a legislator can be disqualified as a member of the Parliament.

Those grounds are:

  • If he/she holds any office of profit under the Government of India or any of the states;
  • If he/she is declared of unsound mind by a Court;
  • If he/she is an undischarged insolvent;
  • If he/she is not a citizen of India anymore;
  • If he/she is disqualified by virtue of any law passed by the parliament of India.

Office of Profit

As it is a ground for disqualification as a member of Parliament, it is essential to understand what exactly does the office of profit means.

Office of profit refers to any post or position under central or state government which fetches salaries, bonuses, perks and other benefits to the individual.

However, the quantity of profit gained is irrelevant under this disqualification.

Under section 9 of Representation of people Act and Article 191(1)(a) of the Indian Constitution, it is envisaged that no representative should bear any office of profit.

Disqualifications under the Representation of Peoples Act

A member of parliament can also be disqualified under the Representation of Peoples Act, 1951. This act was passed by the Parliament under Article 327 of the Indian Constitution, which provides for the procedure and the conduct to be followed during the election to Parliament and state legislatures.

Following are the grounds:

  • If he/she is convicted for indulging in corrupt practices during the election or any other election-related offenses.
  • If he/she is convicted under certain acts of Indian Penal Code, Unlawful Activities Prevention Act, Prevention of Terrorism Act 2002, etc.
  • If he/she is convicted under any law that results for at least two years of imprisonment and will remain disqualified for a further 6 years after his release.
  • If he/she is convicted under any law relating to drugs or dowry prevention.
  • Dismissal from the government due to disloyalty or involvement in corrupt practices.
  • If he/she fails to lodge their election expenses.

Disqualification on ground of defection

The need for an anti-defection law was felt in India when in 1967, one legislator from Haryana, Gaya Lal, changed his party thrice in a single day. Also, the General Elections of 1967 saw a great number of defections was seen as around 150 MPs flitted their political parties.

However, an act tackling such problems was passed by Parliament in the year 1985.

With 52nd amendment to Indian Constitution, provisions regarding disqualification of the basis of defection were inserted in the 10th schedule of the Indian Constitution.

As per the provisions, the members can be disqualified on the following grounds:

  • When members of a political party don’t abide by his/her party leadership or voluntarily resigns from the party.
  • When members don’t votes or refrains from voting according to his/her party whip.
  • An Independent member stands disqualified if he/she joins a political party.
  • For nominated members, if he/she is not a member of any political party, he/she if want, has to join a political party within 6 months of nomination or membership stands canceled.

However, voluntarily giving up membership has quite a broader meaning. In the case of Ravi Naik vs Union of India, giving up membership doesn’t necessarily mean resigning, but it can also be inferred by the conduct of the member.

Now let’s look for which people have the authority to disqualify the members.

The chairman, in the case of Rajya Sabha and the Speaker, in the case of Lok Sabha has powers to disqualify a member on grounds of defection.

And, regarding complaints of Speaker/Chairperson involved in defecation, a member elected by the house itself will take necessary actions regarding the same.

This law also has some exceptions, specifically when political parties merge with some other political party.

Vacation of seats

Now, the question comes in our mind is, what if a member vacates his seat?

And what are the grounds of vacation of seats?

So, to deal with such situations, our Constitution provides us with Article 101 in the Fifth part of the Indian Constitution.

Thus, as envisaged under this Article, a member must vacate his/her seat if

  • He/she is elected in both houses as this article clearly states that no person shall be chosen as members in both the houses.
  • He/she becomes a member of the Central legislature as well as a state legislature, then he must vacate his seat in the house.
  • He/she becomes subject to any of the disqualifications mentioned by Parliament
  • He/she, without permission of the speaker, is absent from the house for consecutive 60 days

And, after a seat is vacated in either of legislative houses, polls are conducted to fill the vacancy.

https://lawsikho.com/course/certificate-course-in-advanced-civil-litigation-practice-procedure-and-drafting
      Click above

Speaker and Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha

To preside over sessions of the house, the Speaker of the Lok Sabha is elected among the sitting members of the house. He/she is generally elected in the first meeting of the Lok Sabha and serves a tenure of 5 years along with that particular Lok Sabha. And as normally practiced, the Speaker is a member of the ruling party or alliance.

Regarding the election of the Speaker, sitting MPs proposes names and the same are notified to the President of India.

Then a date for the election is notified.

Now, if only one name is proposed by the MPs, no formal voting happens but, in a case where a proposal for more than one name shows up, a division vote is organized and the Speaker is chosen accordingly.

Inter alia (among other things), one of the main functions of a Speaker is to decide upon whether a bill is a money bill or not.

His/her function also includes maintaining decorum and discipline in the house and punishing those who are not complying with his guidelines. Also, in the order of precedence, he/she is ranked 6th, parallel to the Chief Justice of India.

According to Article 94 and Article 96 of the Indian Constitution, a Speaker can be removed by a resolution passed with an effective majority, i.e More the 50% of the members of the house.

He/she can also be removed according to The Representation of the People Act and when a bill is wrongly certified as a money bill by the Speaker.

The Deputy Speaker of the Lok Sabha serves as a Number-Two, who in the absence of the Speaker carries forward his roles and functions.

He/she also has a tenure of 5 years and can leave the post midway if he/she ceases to be a member of parliament.

Sessions of Parliament 

Now coming to Sessions of the Parliament, let’s first understand what exactly a session is.

So, whenever either of the houses meets for the conduct of its business, for the period it meets, is called a session.

With not more than a 6-months gap, the president can summon either of the houses for conducting a session.

Thus, the Parliament must necessarily meet at least two times a year.

As per convention, three sessions are conducted by the Indian Parliament in a year:

  • Budget Session between February and May.
  • Monsoon Session between July and September.
  • Winter Session between November and December.

Prorogation

Prorogation of the house essentially means termination of a session of the house.

The notice of prorogation is issued by the Speaker or the Chairperson of the House. After a session is ended, the presiding officer adjourns the house sine die, i.e with no appointed date for resuming the house and then after a few days, the notice is issued.

However, houses of the Parliament can also be adjourned or prorogued when in session.

This is provided under Article 85(2) of the Indian Constitution.

Dissolution

The power to dissolve the Lok Sabha is placed with the President of India in accordance with Article 85 of the Indian Constitution.

In two cases, dissolution of the Lok Sabha is possible:

  • When the term of the Lok Sabha, i.e 5 years complete and is dissolved by the leader of the ruling party.
  • When the government loses the majority and floor test is about to happen, in that case, the president can dissolve the house.

And, it is completely different from adjournment or prorogation as Dissolution means the end of the term of that particular Lok Sabha.

Effect of Dissolution on the business pending in the House

Articles 107 and 108 of the Indian Constitution deals with these situations.

It states that whenever the Lok Sabha is dissolved, be it after completing its whole term or midway, all the business, which includes bills, notices, petitions, motions, etc, do lapses.

When a new Lok Sabha is elected and it begins with its sittings, all the motions, bills and notices need re-introduction in the house.

Functions of the Parliament

From the gist of what our constitution provides, we may infer that Parliament is an institution which exerts an amalgamation of executive and legislative authority.

There are certain functions that the Parliament of India serves.

Following are the functions:

  • Legislation 

The basic function which the Parliament serves is of legislating.

Legislating essentially means making laws and provisions for the smooth functioning of the government and the nation at large.

This function is embedded in Article 107-108 of the Indian Constitution.

Raison d’etre of this function is the realization of the constitutional objective of India as a welfare state.

  • Providing the cabinet 

Another basic function of the parliament is providing the cabinet, which stands responsible for the Parliament itself and provides the proper aide to the President.

However, the cabinet is accountable only towards the Lok Sabha, it may consist of members from Rajya Sabha too.

  • Control of the cabinet 

It is a function of the parliament to see if the cabinet is able to maintain its trust through the majority of the ruling party, i.e. if the ruling party loses trust or majority, the cabinet must have to resign.

The same is expressed in Article 75(3) of the Indian Constitution.

  • Criticism and evaluation of the cabinet

Criticizing and evaluating the cabinet and the ministers is the foremost function of the parliament.

As the cabinet is responsible for the Parliament, evaluation of the actions and decisions of the cabinet must be done by other members. This serves as a safety valve and provides for a system of checks.

It bars the government to act in a dictatorial way while avoiding the public interest. This function can be discharged by both the houses of the parliament.

  • Financial control

The legislature has exclusive authority to allocate expenditures and finances for public services and other affairs. It also provides with the measures to be taken for raising revenue and receipts to be appropriated according to needs.

These authorities are wielded in such a way that keeps the democracy basic essence of our constitution alive.

Ordinary Bill

Any bill, which is proposed in the Parliament is an ordinary bill except those which get the certificate of money bill by the Speaker of the Lok Sabha.

It can be proposed/introduced in either of the houses, i.e. Rajya Sabha or Lok Sabha.

It can be introduced by a minister as well as a private member and those introduced by a private member is known as a private member bill.

For introducing such bills, the president’s recommendation is not required and necessary.

Unlike the money bill, these bills can be rejected or amended even in the Rajya Sabha and the Upper House can detain such bills for a period of up to 6 months, not further than that.

Also, if such bills were defeated in the Lok Sabha, it may lead to the resignation of the whole government if introduced by a member.

Once sent for approval of the President, these bills can be accepted, rejected or returned for reconsideration to the house.

Joint Sitting of Houses

In case of a deadlock between both, the houses of parliament regarding the passing of a bill, the President of India may summon a joint sitting of both the houses.

The joint sitting of both the houses is presided over by the Speaker of the Lok Sabha and in his absence, the Deputy Speaker of the Lok Sabha discharges this function.

Article 108 of the Indian Constitution provides provisions for this mechanism which breaks the deadlock between both the houses.

According to this Article, a joint session can be called upon only if:

  • A bill, after being passed out in one house, and the other house rejects it;
  • One of the houses doesn’t accept the amendments passed by the other house;
  • When 6 months elapse, and the other house doesn’t pass the bill.

There are some exceptions available to the Joint Sitting of the Houses:

  • Money Bill: According to the Constitution, Money bills only require approval from the Lok Sabha, thus, in case of money bill the situation arises for a Joint Sitting of the Houses.
  • Constitutional Amendment Bills: A Constitutional amendment bill can be passed on through a 2/3rd majority of both the houses and doesn’t have a provision for Joint Sittings in case of disagreement between the houses.

President’s Assent

According to Article 111 of the Indian Constitution, when a bill is passed by both the houses of the Parliament it must be presented to the President and he/she needs to declare that he/she assents to the bill or withholds assent.

Money Bill

According to Article 110 of the Indian Constitution, a bill can be defined as a money bill if it deals with imposition, abolition, alteration or regulation of any taxes and such bills can only be introduced in the Lok Sabha and only by a member having a ministerial portfolio.

It can only be introduced on the recommendation of the president. Also, it requires certification of the Lok Sabha Speaker, when transferred to the Rajya Sabha.

If this bill is defeated in the Lok Sabha, the entire cabinet has to resign, and also, it can’t be returned for review by the President.

Financial Bills

Financial bills are quite similar to those of Money bills.

To understand what a Financial bill is, we may assert that any such bill which carries some of the provisions of Article 110 of the Indian Constitution relating to expenditure and taxation is a financial bill.

Such bills are introduced only in Lok Sabha on the recommendation of the President and it needs to be passed in both the houses.

Now, the question which arises is what are the differences between a Money Bill and a Financial Bill?

To understand easily, we may say that Money Bills are a kind of subset of Financial Bills, i.e. all the Money Bills are Financial bills but the same is not true vice-versa.

The distinction between Money Bills, Financial Bills and Bills involving expenditures

The major difference between a Money Bill and a Financial Bill is that Rajya Sabha can’t amend the Money bill but this is not the case with the Financial Bills.

Also, a Money Bill strictly deals only with the provisions as laid down in Article 110 of the Indian Constitution while a Financial bill can also cover other provisions than taxation and expenditure.

A Money bill needs certification from the Speaker of the Lower House, while a Financial Bill doesn’t need any such certification.

Annual Financial Statement (Budget)

The Annual Financial Statement or as often called, budget is an important document dealing with the finances of a nation.

Provisions relating to Budget are discussed in Article 112 of the Indian Constitution.

The budget is presented in such a way that expenditure and receipts regarding fiscal and deficits of the current year, the previous year and the year for which budget is presented.

The Annual Financial Statement consists of three parts i.e Consolidated fund of India, Public Account of India and Contingency Fund of India.

It also includes an account of loans advanced by the government or the loans to be recovered by it including borrowing from Reserve Bank of India.

Discussion and voting on Budget

So, after a budget is proposed by the Finance Minister, it is followed by Extensive discussion in the house and lastly, voting is done.

The voting is done on the Demands of Grants.

Now, what are the Demands of Grants?

Demands of Grants basically mean expected spending by a particular department or ministry. Now after this voting is done, the parliament happens to be in recess.

After the recess is over, then all the standing committees submit their respect reports followed by discussion and voting.

This is all how discussion and voting are done during the tabling of the budget in the budget session of parliament.

Appropriation Bills

After the discussions are over on budget and expenses, then an appropriation bill is tabled by the government if it intends to withdraw funds from the Consolidated Fund of India. 

This is done when the government wants to withdraw the funds for expanding and meeting the expenditure.

It must be noted that this bill is introduced only in the Lok Sabha.

Supplementary Additional or Excess Grants 

Excess Grants are granted to the Government when the amount authorized for a particular service by virtue of a law is found to be insufficient.

These funds are granted by the President of India.

The Constitution of India discusses this in Article 115 of part V.

Also, when the actual expenditure incurred on a certain service or scheme is more than what was allocated for the same, then the Comptroller and Auditor General takes action and brings notice to the Parliament.

After that, the respective ministers raise demand for excess grant and then the procedure regarding the same is followed by voting and discussion. 

General Rules of Procedure

The General rules of procedure deal with the procedure and conduct to be followed in both the houses. It lays down the parliamentary procedures and rules according to which the parliament must function. 

It also lay down process according to which the parliament must table and pass a bill or other kinds of legislation. It also deals with the structure and function of the standing committees on different matters

These rules are fundamental for the genuine working and functioning of the Parliament.

Parliamentary Control over Financial Matters

Financial matters in India are largely controlled by the Parliament. This control includes control over revenue matters and expenditure related issues.

As stated in the Constitution in Article 265, no tax can be collected or levied by the executive authorities without any law supporting it. So, if tax is imposed upon anyone without having legislative backing, then the person can go to court for redressal.

As Parliament holds control over the Consolidated Fund of India, its control over the expenditure is pivotal. As the Consolidated fund of India is the reservoir of all the expenses and finances of India, the parliament thus exerts full control over expenditure.

Parliamentary Committees

Parliamentary committees are made to ease the scrutinizing of the legislative and other matters of the Parliament. Broadly, these committees can be classified as Standing committees, which are permanent and ad hoc committees that are temporary and are constituted according to the need.

Among the standing committees, the estimates committee, public accounts committee and public undertakings committees are the major ones.

However, 17 different standing committees for different departments are also constituted for easing the business. Some such committees are committees of petitions, a committee of privileges, committee on papers laid, etc.

While the Ad Hoc committees are more of temporary committees. These committees address matters like committees on five-year plans, the joint committee on Bofors agreement, committee on food management in the parliament, etc.

Language to be used in Parliament

The official languages of India can be used in the Parliament of India, i.e. Hindi and English.

Article 343 of the Indian Constitution provides for the official language of India. However, the members can use any of the scheduled languages while in discussion or debate.

Restriction on discussion in Parliament

To keep the doctrine of Separation of Power intact, the Constitution of India forbids the Parliament to legislate and discuss certain matters.

Article 121 discusses these provisions.

This includes any discussion regarding the conduct of the judges of the Supreme Court or judges of any of the High Courts. However, the discussion can happen in the question of the impeachment of a judge.

Courts not to inquire into proceedings of Parliament

This may be seen as vice-versa provision of Article 121. Article 122 of the Constitution provides for the provision that the courts can not inquire into the proceedings of the legislation.

Also, any officer or member of the Parliament while exercising his powers endowed upon him/her by parliament is not subject to the jurisdiction of any of the Courts.

The Comptroller and Auditor-General of India

In the words of the architect of the Indian Constitution, Dr.B.R. Ambedkar, the Comptroller and Auditor-General of India is one of the most important officers which the Constitution provides for as he/she looks after finances and expenditure by the Parliament.

CAG of India is not accountable towards anyone but the public as he/she looks after the public purse of the nation.

Article 148 of the Constitution talks about the appointment of CAG and its oath. He/she also derives authority from The Comptroller and Auditor General’s (Duties, Powers and Conditions of Service) Act, 1971.

Duties and Powers

The major duties and functions of the CAG, according to the Indian Constitution are:

  • All the accounts of Union Government and State Governments come under the ambit of Audit by the CAG.
  • All the expenditures from the Contingency Fund and the Public Account are also audited by the CAG.
  • CAG also audits all the expenditures and receipts by all the Government authorities and Undertakings.
  • CAG can also audit account of the local bodies on request of the President or the Governor.
  • CAG also acts as a guide to the Public Accounts Committee in Parliament.

Conclusion 

Therefore, in this exhaustive article about the Indian Parliament, we discussed almost all the aspects and functions of the Parliament.

Parliament is an essential political and constitutional institution that forms the bedrock of values reflecting those of democracy and representation of people and thus is fundamental in achieving the constitutional goals. 

References


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content. 

The post The Parliament of India Under Indian Constitution appeared first on iPleaders.

Immigration in the US: Know everything about it

$
0
0

This article is written by Indrasish Majumder. 

Introduction 

The predominant building block that aided America in becoming the unique nation state that it is, is its significant immigration populace. Disputation over the subject of immigration and border security has been turned pestilential because of the trend among politicians to prioritize politics over morality and principles because of this, American citizens often end up discovering themselves squeezed between bigots on both sides. Traditionally US has been welcoming towards immigrants, from any corner of the world. When analyzing the economic, security and humane issues concerning the country, immigration has been the touchstone to U.S politics over decades. Upon failure of the Congress to arrive to a consensus on immigration reform, the duty has been vested on the judicial and executive sections of the government. Several reasons can be attributed to US being the hub for immigrants: from familial unification, healthy work environment, safety, to refuge from war and natural disasters. The immigration scenario worsened following the election of Donald J. Trump, who was elected on promises to prevent immigration, together with controversial plans to create the border wall with Mexico, extradite millions of documented immigrants and provisionally ban Muslims.

Immigration population in the US 

A significant percent of the US population comprise of immigrants (14%), according to the Census Bureau. Approximately 43 million people of the 323 million are immigrants. The percentage indicates a persistent rise since 1970, when the number of immigrants increased to 10 million. However, in the 21st century, the percentage of immigrants have reduced significantly, compared to the 1970’s and 1980’s, when residents born in the foreign and residing in the US, made up 15% of the population. Immigration from Mexico is the highest compared to other countries in Latin America, (25%) however from the East and SouthEast Asia percentage of immigration (27%) is on the rise. The recent scrutiny in immigration is a result of the undocumented immigrants’ population in the US which counts to 11 million and has risen since the 2003 global economic meltdown.

It has been noted by the office of Customs and Border Protection, in 2019 twice the number of people have been apprehended, compared to the last year. However more than half of the unregistered immigrants have been US residents for more than a decade, as recorded by the Pew Research Centre. It needs to however be taken in consideration that not all of these immigrants are legally entitled to be granted citizenship. The immigrants from Central America are protected under the U.S constitution, when seeking asylum and in granting citizenship. Immigrants on the other hand from Mexico has different legal rights. The 2008, anti-Human Trafficking law allows Mexican Nationals hearing before a competent court, previous to being expatriated to their countries. Currently 900,000 cases are pending for hearing before the immigration courts. 1.1 million individuals were granted permanent residency in the US in 2017. 

Historical perspective to the Immigration laws 

US has historically shown instances of ratifying restrictive exclusionary laws concerning immigrants, “The Chinese Exclusion Act of 1882”, “National Origins Act of 1924” or the illegal Immigration Reform and Immigrant Responsibility Act of 1996. Several legislative enactments have since liberalized America’s stance towards the immigrants. Namely “The Refugee Act 1980” which elaborated on the definition of Refugees and increased their annual inflow. A Democratic Government in 1986 enacted a major immigration reform bill, which ensured citizenship to people, who came in the US before 1982. The Temporary Protected Status Program signed in 1990 by President George H.W Bush, ensured individuals escaping natural disasters and war, to legally work and stay in the US, until the situation normalizes in their home country.

In 2001 “The Dream Act” supported undocumented youth in ensuring them legal status as citizens. It is however yet to be ratified as law. The Deferred Action for Childhood Arrivals program, created by President Obama 2012, helped young immigrants without status, who grew up in the US as children, apply for work authorization permits and in sheltering them from deportation. Until November 2019, nine hundred thousand people is recorded to have been advantaged by the initiative. A program on similar lines Deferred Action for Parents of Americans, was adopted by President Obama to benefit the undocumented parents of U.S citizens but was quashed by the Supreme Court in 2016 with the Trump government coming in power. The “Immigration and Nationality Act 1965” terminated the National Origins Quota system, which had advocated European immigrants. The act laid down the basis of immigration as 1) family reunification 2) needs of employers. 

With the election of Donald Trump in 2017, the subject of immigration reform has been unduly neglected. Measures have been proposed and even passed with bipartisan support, but is always frustrated of final passage. The immigration policies of the Obama government were the subject of criticism, particularly for overseeing the expulsion of three million people during his eight years’ tenure, exceeding that of President Bush and Bill Clinton. Several Republicans have arraigned the Obama administration for reducing deportation to undocumented immigrates accused of serious crimes, terming the same policy as soft on enforcement. The Trump Government however committed atrocities against immigrants beyond imagination. From instructing the federal agencies to build a wall between the U.S and Mexico, to the initiative focused on the prevention of Terrorism and effectively banning immigration from any middle east countries. Under Trump the annual inflow of refugees was restricted to 50,000 in 2017. The Temporary protected status was abolished for the Nicaraguans and Haitians, who had been permitted to stay in the US, following escaping environmental disaster in their home country. The Government’s aim of condemning the DACA and the DAPA as “illegal” and attempts made towards adding a citizenship question to the 2020 census has been prevented by the courts. In 2018 the Trump administration introduced the “zero-tolerance policy” wherein authorities prosecuted anyone crossing the southern border without authorization. However, a plethora of democratic primaries have voiced against Trump’s administrative alteration to the existing immigration policies. While some have agreed to speak in favor of stripping criminal penalties for migrants, some have agreed helping central American countries with aid and government health insurance plans for undocumented immigrants.

https://lawsikho.com/course/certificate-criminal-litigation-trial-advocacy
                 Click Above

The immigration debacle

The discourse over border security and immigration has been toxicated over the years because of the trend amongst politicians to prioritize politics over morality and principles. Americans have ended up finding themselves sandwiched between extremists on both sides.

The focal point of the debate in the beginning was however not whether immigration should be allowed or disallowed, but rather how the same can be ensured while preserving the American sovereignty and the rule of law. Few guiding principles might aid in the modulation of a beneficial schedule with regards to immigration policy. Firstly, any suggestions by Government should be perceived with respect and not skepticism, it should be remembered Government is nothing but an acolyte of the citizenry. Immigration in the US can be allowed only with the consent of the American populace. However, the consent should not be based upon the whims of individuals but on the laws of the country. Laws which are conducive towards immigrants, allowing them entrance pertaining to reasonable conditions as fellow residents. At the cost of granting citizenship to all and every destitute, homeless individual the national security and safety of the nation cannot be compromised. Only a disorderly and messy immigration system allows individuals to go on the backside of law, and exploit the openness, to put the nation’s security in jeopardy. Border security, particularly in times of such widespread terrorist insurgencies is important if not mandatory. Immigrants not concurring with the laws of the country cannot be attributed legal status, since doing the same would put individuals who obey the law and rules to jeopardy. As much as lawmakers are expected to respect the rule of law so are the immigrants.

On the basis of the above mentioned principles, it can be stated reforms in immigration should involve adapting to a merit-based system. Implementation of practices alike chain migration, arbitrary immigration caps, visa lottery for the illegal immigrants should be banned. Any loopholes hampering the administration of immigration laws, or legitimizing illegitimate asylum claimants to stay in the US indefinitely should be filled in. 

The Open Society Foundations aid organizations and individuals formulate a constructive immigration policy. Committees such as the International Rescue Committee allows emergency assistance and long-term, financial aid until the immigrants turn self-sufficient. The Detention Watch Network committee, is a collaboration of 94 members composed of formerly impeded people their families, community and groups grounded on faith and legal service providers. They are involved in awaring the vicinity of the illegality of U.S immigration detention and deportation system. Welcoming America an internationally acclaimed NGO with operations in over 115 communities across the US and aims upon negotiating and building bridges between newcomers and long time residents. The World Church Service created in the aftermath of WW2 operates with the objective of alleviating hunger, poverty reducing displacement and disaster. 

The issues with regards to immigration should be dealt singularly. They must be addressed in a fair, prudent and humane manner. The subject of immigration is far too important to be ignored or be influenced by partisan agendas. Focus should be fixated on what is best for the welfare of all US citizens in the short and long run.

Response of State and Local authorities

The response towards immigration and immigrants differs from one state to another. Whence California, is more liberal enabling undocumented immigrants to apply for drivers’ license, receive tuition scholarships and other benefits. Arizona have enacted laws allowing police to question people suspected with regards to their immigration status. 

Usually the federal government is obliged to implement laws relating to immigration, but some power is delegated to the local authorities as well. However, it is debatable to what extent state and local law enforcement officers are obliged to comply with the federal agents. As per data presented by the Legal Resource center, six hundred state and local jurisdictions have been found to be uncooperative with the federal agents.

President Trump whence decrying such local and state sanctuary jurisdictions throughout his campaign, had ratified an executive order, of reducing funding to such authorities. Additionally, he initiated a tendentious program termed Secure Committees, instructing state and local agents to scrutinize the passports of all immigrants and mention to the federal agencies the names of those immigrants found to be residing illegally. However, this initiative of Trump has been put to question in courts. Justice Department in 2018, pressed a lawsuit against the state of California, asserting several state laws have been found to be impeding federal immigration administrations. 

States have opined against Trump’s border security measures. A least five Governors have repudiated Trump’s initiative to locate National Guards to the Southern borders. It can therefore be perceived while some states have yet been unable to overcome their reservations concerning the immigrants to a holistic reorientation of the laws, policies and approach towards the immigrants is in order.

Bibliography


Students of Lawsikho courses regularly produce writing assignments and work on practical exercises as a part of their coursework and develop themselves in real-life practical skill.

LawSikho has created a telegram group for exchanging legal knowledge, referrals and various opportunities. You can click on this link and join:

https://t.me/joinchat/J_0YrBa4IBSHdpuTfQO_sA

Follow us on Instagram and subscribe to our YouTube channel for more amazing legal content.

The post Immigration in the US: Know everything about it appeared first on iPleaders.

Viewing all 14289 articles
Browse latest View live


<script src="https://jsc.adskeeper.com/r/s/rssing.com.1596347.js" async> </script>